Home

"user manual"

1. ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table E2757 Function DR Setting Description Step2 Steady pulse frequency D0002 100 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz lera Frequency change time 00003 3000 10 to 10 000 inincrements of 1 ms Preset value D0004 00005 5000 1 to 100 000 000 ad Control direction D0006 Forward Acceleration deceleration contra 00006 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number 00007 2 0104 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D0002 100 1kHz Frequency change time D0003 3000 3 000 msec Preset value D0004 D0005 5000 Preset value 5 000 Control direction D0006 Forward Forward 0 Acceleration deceleration control D0006 Acceleration deceleration later Acceleration deceleration later 2 Next step number D0007 2 Step 2 Step 2 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table E3757 Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Steady pulse frequency 00008 20 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time 00009 3000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value 00010 00011 5000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction 00012 Forward Acceleration deceleration contral D0012 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number 00013 3 0104 step Function Device address Setting
2. Data typ D L F Double Group Name Symbol Word Integer Long Float word Digital Input I Special Internal Relay M Input n Shift Register R Analog Input xt x Digital Output Output 9 Internal Relay M Logical AND AND Negative Logical AND NAND Logical OR OR Negative Logical OR NOR Logical Exclusive Logical OR XOR E Operation Negative Exclusive Logical OR XNOR Negation NOT Shot up SOTU Shot down SOTD Truth Table TRUTH On delay Count Up Timer TIMU X On delay Count Down Timer TIMD X Off delay Count Up Timer TIMOU X Time Off delay Count Down Timer TIMOD X imer On off delay Timer TIMCU X Single Shot Pulse SPULS X Dual Timer DTIM X Random Pulse Output RPULS X Adding Counter CNT X X Counter Up Down Selection Reversible CUD X X E 2 Counter Hour Meter HOUR X Shift Register Shift Register SFR T Data Comparison CMP X X X X AM Schmitt Trigger 5176 x X X X P Comparison Range Comparison RCMP X X X X Pele Alternate Output ALT L 2 Conversion Week Weekly Timer WEEK Yearly Timer YEAR Interface Message MSG X
3. obi ub Bilan umb The timer FB TIMU Count 8 1 TIMD Count Down Timer one ron esee enun nana na EErEE 8 5 TIMOU Off delay Count Up Elmer eec rtt uua hana nn PE nues ava IR ISa 8 7 TIMOD Off delay Count DOWN TImer iiie eee once erue ar SERA DERE REY kal 8 9 TIMCU On off delay uM E E 8 11 SPULS Single Shot Pulse SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 TABLE CONTENTS Cures 9 Cures 10 Cures 11 Carrer 12 Cures 13 Cures 14 Cures 15 Carrer 16 CAPTER 17 Carrer 18 NDEX RPUES Random Pulse QuEDUL 5 2 artt bis nain iota dp aa neon nue Eo iR vua 8 19 The counter FB CNT Adding CUD
4. Ve J Number of constituent bits N 16 Output v 1 o 1 1 3 e o 1 13 o 1 Example 2 When the direction input DIR is on and the execution input TRG is turned on the shift registers as many as the number of constituent bits starting with the specified shift register are shifted by 1 bit in descending order The state of the data input DI is stored in the MSB most significant bit of the shift registers Output OUT is the state of the bit shifted out Shift register R RO Data input DI R15 RO 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 119 V A Number of constituent bits 16 gt Output Vv 1 o o 1 1 e o When of the following conditions is met a user program execution error occurs output is turned off Notes The number of constituent bits exceeds the range Shift registers specified with the start register and the number of the constituent bits does not exist e For user program execution errors see Chapter 14 Troubleshooting Errors User Program Execution Errors in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 10 2 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 ZIDEC 11 THE COMPARISON The comparison FB compares device values analog values or constants and outputs the comparison result CMP Data Comparison Compar
5. FB Size List Qty of Bytes Device type Number of Used Group Name Symbol devices Logical AND AND 12 1 Negative Logical AND NAND 12 1 Logical OR OR 12 1 Negative Logical OR NOR 12 1 Exclusive Logical OR XOR 8 1 Logical Operation B Negative Exclusive Logical OR XNOR 8 1 Negation NOT 8 1 Shot Up SOTU 8 1 Shot Down SOTD 8 1 Truth Table TRUTH 16 1 On delay Count Up Timer TIMU 8 1 On delay Count Down Timer TIMD 1 Off delay Count Up Timer TIMOU 12 1 Off delay Count Down Timer TIMOD 12 1 Timer T On off delay Timer TIMCU 12 2 Single Shot Pulse SPULS 12 1 Dual Timer DTIM 12 3 Random Pulse Output RPULS 12 3 CNT W 12 1 Adding Counter CNT D 12 2 Counter CUD W 16 3 Up Down Selection Reversible Counter CUD D 16 6 Hour Meter HOUR 12 3 1 DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 A 3 APPENDIX FB Number of Used of Bytes Device Group Name Symbol RENE typ devices Shift Register Shift Register SFR 16 1 Data Comparison CMP 16 B 1 Data Comparison Schmitt Trigger STIG 20 1 Range Comparison RCMP 20 1 Data Conversion Alternate Output ALT 12 1 Weekly Timer WEEK 20 to 130 1 Week Programmer Yearly Timer YEAR 24 to 212 1 Interface Message MSG 12 or more 1 Pulse Output PULS 24 1 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 24 1 Pulse Ramp Pulse Output RAMP 28 B 1 Zero Return ZRN 20 1 Advanced Ramp ARAMP 36
6. Cancel The Insert Bit Device dialog box opens 4 Configure the parameters so that the room temperature is displayed when 0000 is on and the outdoor temperature is displayed when M0000 is off Set Device to M0000 Using the keyboard enter IDEC room temp is as the ON Text and IDEC outdoor temp is as the OFF Text Under Display Option disable all of the options Insert Bit Device ER Device 0000 ss Display Option Blinking Invert Displayed when M0000 is on Occupied Area Row x Column 1 x 24 Special Character Ovenwrite Displayed when 0000 is off ON Text tleje iis OFF Text u t dlolo r 1 8 DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 11 14 THE INTERFACE FB 5 After the settings are configured click OK The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area MSG Message L9 j Options Priority 0 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display SpecialData Special Character Insert Lato feet with effect BarGraph a 0 0 mi lt gt Configuring the text with effect 6 Select the six column area from the start of th
7. Parameter tab This tab configures the ON OFF settings for the output A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for 1 WEEK FB If indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK FB with data registers the values configured on the parameter tabs are stored in the data registers when the initialization input is turned on This setting is shared in common with Configuring the day of the week and the time as constant settings on page 13 3 See Parameter tab on page 13 4 uPreview The preview shows the ON OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs as a time chart This function is shared in common with Configuring the day of the week and the time as constant settings on page 13 3 See Preview on page 13 5 DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 7 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB Data Register Allocation If indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK FB with data registers the settings are allocated to the data registers are follows Storage destination Data size word R read W write Settings Start address 0 1 R W Day of the week Start address 1 1 R W P 1 tab ON time Start address 2 1 R W OFF time Start address 3 1 R W Day of the week Start address 4 1 R W P 2 tab ON time Start address 5 1 R W OFF time Start address 57 1 R W Day of the week Start address 58 1 R W P 20 tab ON time Start address
8. 1 2 4 Preset value 5 000 Preset value 5 000 100 kHz 10000 When the ARAMP1 FB initialization input I1 turns on the control register value is initialized e When the ARAMP1 FB execution input 10 turns on pulse output starts Basic settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table 9 mE Devices Settings Ramp Table 1 00014 51 Register INI Initialization Input INT Interrupt Input D1 Monitor Register D2 Operation Status Tag Name D0000 10001 i 20 D0000 10001 poozo Comment ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table EN Devices Settinos Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Reversible control enable Single pulse output Number of steps 4 1to 18 steps step number 1 1 to 4 step Interrupt step number 00000 1 1 to 4 step Function Device address Setting value Details Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Reversible control enable Single pulse output Number of steps 4 2 Start step number 1 Step 1 Interrupt step number D0000 DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 39 15 THE PULSE Step 1 settings
9. Status code Status Description 0 Normal 1 SD memory card insertion error The SD memory card is not inserted 2 SD memory card capacity error The SD memory card is full 3 SD memory card writing error Writing trace data to the SD memory card fails 4 CSV file capacity error The CSV file exceeds 5 MB 5 SD memory card protection error The SD memory card is write protected The TRACE FB is executed while another DLOG FB or TRACE FB is being 6 SD memory card access error executed 7 Characters conversion error Converting trace data to numeric characters fails Folder creation error Creating the folder fails 9 CSV file open error Opening the CSV file fails 32 Executing TRACE FB Writing trace data to SD memory card is in progress 3 Settings The list of trace data to be output to the CSV files Display type I Q M R T TC TP B D AI DEC W X X X X X DEC I X DEC D X X X DEC L X DEC F X HEX W X X S X X X B HEX D X X X BIN B X X X X X X 16 10 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 16 THE DATA LOGGING 4 Tag Name Enter tag names or device addresses to specify the devices which values are output to the CSV files 5 Device Address When the devices are specified as tag names the corresponding device addresses are shown 6 Display Type Select the disp
10. 6 Initial operation mode Select the range of frequencies to output from the two modes Initial operation mode 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz 1 Hz increments 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz 10 Hz increments 7 Initial pulse frequency Specify the initial pulse frequency to output Initial operation mode 0 Set the frequency in the range of 1 Hz to 10 kHz in 1 Hz increments Initial operation mode 1 Set the frequency in the range of 200 Hz to 100 kHz in 10 Hz increments 8 Creep operation mode Select the range of frequencies to output from the two modes Creep operation mode 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz 1 Hz increments 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz 10 Hz increments 9 Creep pulse frequency Specify the creep pulse frequency to output Creep operation mode 0 Set the frequency in the range of 1 Hz to 10 kHz in 1 Hz increments Creep operation mode 1 Set the frequency in the range of 200 Hz to 100 kHz in 10 Hz increments 10 Error status If a configuration error occurs when the ZRN FB execution input turns from off to on M8004 user program execution error is turned on and the error code is stored in this register Emorcode Come Details 0 2 Initial pulse frequency The frequency was not set to a value between 1 and 10 000 in operation mode 0 designation error The frequency was not set to a value between 20 and 10 000 in operation mode 1 IDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 23 15 THE PULSE F
11. D0004 D0005 100000 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 Preset value 100 000 15 19 15 THE PULSE To output 1 000 000 pulses with the frequency change function reversible control by dual pulse output When the RAMP FB execution input IO turns from off to on pulse output starts For forward when I1 is off pulses CW output from Q14 For reverse when I1 is on pulses CCW are output from Q15 I0000 Initialize Pulse M8120 Q0000 e When the SmartAXIS changes from STOP to RUN the initialize input M8120 turns on e When the RAMP FB execution input 10 turns on pulse output starts e When I1 is off SmartAXIS operates in the forward direction e When I1 is on SmartAXIS operates in the reverse direction RAMP Ramp Pulse Output E3774 Devices Settings RAMP 1 Q0014 51 Register INI Initialization Input D1 OperationStatus Tag Name M8120 fs m0100 sl Device Address D0000 M8120 M0100 Comment Initialize Pulse RAMP Ramp Pulse Output E3757 Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Operation Mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency 00000 3000 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Initial pulse frequency D0001 1000 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0002 2000 10 to 10 000 in incr
12. SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 25 15 THE PULSE ARAMP Advanced Ramp The ARAMP FB outputs pulses with the frequency change function according to the information in the frequency table Symbol EN ARAMP1 OUT EN ARAMP2 OUT INI INI INT INT Operation When the execution input EN is on pulses are output according to the frequency change settings stored in the specified control registers The pulse frequency is controlled by combining multiple steps that define the frequency change time and steady pulse speed The pulse frequency changes at a constant rate until it reaches the steady pulse frequency and then it keeps until the current pulse count reaches the preset value Or the pulse frequency keeps the frequency of the previous step and then it changes at a constant rate until it reaches the steady pulse frequency You can select one or the other in the step option settings The next step is executed when the number of pulses output reaches the preset value You can configure a maximum of 18 steps Frequency A Step1 i Step2 Step3 Step4 Before 1 Before After The execution timing of the change Steady pulse frequency Steady pulse frequency Steady pulse frequency gt Time Frequency change time Frequency change time When the initialization input INI is turned on the initial values configured in the Settings tab of the
13. Select this option when using pulse output in a single direction Pulse A A Disable and pulse B can be used independently Reversible control Pulse A or B is used as pulse output Single pulse output On off state of pulse C is used as A B mode reversible control c Pulse A is used as forward pulse CW output Pulse B is used as reverse pulse CCW output Reversible control Dual pulse output mode The ports used on the SmartAXIS differ according to the combination of the RAMP FB pulse output port number the reversible control enable setting and the I O type of SmartAXIS Port used RAMP FB Reversible control enable 40 1 0 type 48 I 0 type Pulse output Control Pulse output Control port direction port direction Disable 014 014 RAMP1 Single pulse output 014 Q16 C 2 014 Q12 C Dual pulse output 3 Q14 A Q15 B 3 Q14 A Q15 B Disable Q15 B Q15 B RAMP2 Single pulse output Q15 B Q17 C 2 Q15 B Q13 C 2 Dual pulse mode cannot be used
14. Cancel 3 lt Tag Device address Display Type 7 Repeat Logging data size Remaining size 1024 bytes 0 bytes MAX 1024bytes Cancel 1 S1 Folder name Specify the folder name on the SD memory card to store the log data with a desired text up to 8 single byte alphanumeric characters Notes e The following single byte characters cannot be used in the folder names lt gt 4 9 8 e Consecutive periods cannot be used folder names A period cannot be used at the start or the end of the folder name e Single byte spaces at the start or the end of the folder name are omitted 2 D1 Execution Status Specify the data register to store the status code One of the following status codes is stored according to the DLOG FB execution status and result Status code Status Description 0 Normal 1 SD memory card insertion error The SD memory card is not inserted 2 SD memory card capacity error The SD memory card is full 3 SD memory card writing error Writing log data to the SD memory card fails 4 CSV file capacity error The CSV file exceeds 5 MB 5 SD memory card protection error The SD memory card is write protected 6 SD memory card access error DLOG FB is executed while another DLOG FB or TRACE FB is being executed 7 Characters conversion error Converting log data to numeric characte
15. Word W Conversion Decimal 3 Display Option Blinking E Invert 4 Occupied Area Row xColumn 1x5 Cancel 1 Device Enter the device to display Valid Devices W word TC TP CC CP D I integer D D double word D L long D F float D 2 Data Type and Conversion Type 14 THE INTERFACE FB Select the display type for the specified device The size of the area used on the LCD screen varies based on the specified data type and conversion type Data Type Conversion Type Occupied Area Example on LCD Decimal 5 65535 W word Hexadecimal 4 FFFF I integer Decimal 6 32768 Decimal 10 4294967295 D double word Hexadecimal 8 FFFFFFFF L long Decimal 11 2147483648 F float Decimal 13 3 402823E 38 3 Display Option Configure the options to blink or invert the value of the specified device For the blinking speed see MSG FB Common Settings on page 14 9 Display Option Blinking Description Blinks the value of the specified device Invert Inverts the display of the specified value 4 Occupied Area Shows the size of the area to be used on the LCD screen Lines 1 columns 4 to 13 The area is determined by the selected data type and conversion type SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 5 14 THE INTERFACE FB Insert Bit Device Two different items of text can be switched between
16. 15 11 ZRN Zero EET TEES 15 21 ARAMP Advanced 15 26 The data logging FB DEOG Data LOO sis 16 1 TRACE ruir M des 16 8 script FB xeu a da 17 1 special FB Counter riirii 18 1 5 18 3 Processing inm 5 EEUU Program Processing Scan End Processing Time FB Execution Time Programi sssrinin EEUU 1 2 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DEC 1 OPERATION BASICS This chapter describes basic instructions for operating WindLDR software required for programming and maintenance of the SmartAXIS Pro Lite series Note SmartAXIS Touch series require WindO I NV3 for programming See the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual for instructions for programming and basic operation of WindO I NV3 with the Touch series Starting WindLDR and PLC Selection This section descri
17. Configuring the word device 9 Select the area at the ninth column on the second line and click Word Device MSG Message 19 Options Priority 0 E Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display SpecialData Special Character overwrite m ae NEUEN 4 4 _ The Insert Word Device dialog box opens 10 Set Device to D0002 Data Type to I Integer and Conversion Type to Decimal Under Display Option disable all of the options Insert Word Device 9 Device 0002 Display Option Blinking E Invert Occupied Area Row xColumn 1x6 ok Cancel DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 13 14 THE INTERFACE FB 11 After the settings are configured click OK The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area u 00 UU 0 HERE Options Priority 0 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display Special character overwrite M0000 Bit Device rena Configuring the special character 12 Select the are
18. Exclusive Logical OR XOR 28 8 72 6 Negative Exclusive Logical OR XNOR 28 8 72 8 Negation NOT 26 8 70 8 Shot Up SOTU 27 6 72 6 Shot Down SOTD 27 6 72 8 Truth Table TRUTH i 28 4 73 4 On delay Count Up Timer TIMU 30 0 74 8 On delay Count Down Timer TIMD 29 9 74 6 Off delay Count Up Timer TIMOU ES 30 0 75 0 Tiner Off delay Count Down Timer TIMOD 30 0 75 0 On off delay Timer TIMCU 31 5 77 4 Single Shot Pulse SPULS 42 8 74 8 Dual Timer DTIM 28 0 72 2 Random Pulse Output RPULS 33 5 95 0 Adding Counter CNT TTD is D Double word 41 8 152 0 Counter Up Down Selection Reversible Dus W Word 30 9 75 6 Counter D Double word 38 2 126 8 Hour Meter HOUR 32 7 94 6 Shift Register Shift Register SFR 23 3 50 8 Data Comparison CMP B 30 0 82 0 Data Comparison Schmitt Trigger STTG 28 8 79 8 RCMP 28 1 81 6 Data Conversion Alternate Output ALT 26 4 59 2 Prodramier Weekly Timer WEEK 37 8 112 8 Yearly Timer YEAR 38 0 113 6 Interface Message MSG 27 7 Pulse Output PULS 33 0 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 33 0 Pulse Ramp Pulse Output RAMP 30 9 Zero Return ZRN 30 9 Advanced Ramp ARAMP 56 0 Data Log DLOG E Data Logging Data Trace TRACE Script Script SCRPT ead High speed Counter HSC 29 3 159 0 RS Flip flop RSFF 24 9 53 2 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 A 2 IDEC FBD Program Size APPENDIX When FBD is selected as
19. current value is being incremented the output state is controlled according to the operation mode Specify the length of the time from when the output turns on to when it TP Preset value 0 to 65 535 turns off The preset value be specified as a constant or a data register 2 Input For input precedence the output turns off when the execution input turns off Parameters OP Operation precedence the default is input precedence mode time For time precedence even when the execution input turns off the output precedence keeps on for the length of time specified by the preset value TU Time unit Specify the time unit for the timer 1 to T99 for the 12 I O type 2 The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored Valid Devices Parameter Function I M R T TC TP B D AI Constant TRG Execution input X X X X X X zx RST Reset input X X X X X X Preset value X X 8 14 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 I DE 8 THE TIMER Timing Chart 1 When the operation mode is input precedence Execution input 9N TRG orr 1 on AL Reset input i i RST od ON i i Output AET OUT lt
20. 10kHz 1 nna Preset value 5kHz a a 1 Frequency i change time 5 000 msec 200 Hz Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time 5 000 msec 5 000 msec 8 000 msec 8 000 msec 8 000 msec 10000 When the initialization input I1 turns the ARAMP1 FB EE control register value is initialized Booo0 Q0000 output starts When the ARAMP1 FB execution input IO turns on pulse When the interrupt input I2 turns on the interrupt step is executed Basic settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table ax Devices Settings Ramp Table ARAMP 1 090014 51 Register INI Initialization Input INT Interrupt Input D1 Monitor Register D2 Operation Status Tag Name 00000 ooo mo 00020 Device Address mo 1 1 1 1 1 1 n Commen ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table 9 Devices Settings Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description ucc Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Ecc Reversible control enable Disabled Number of steps 6 1to 18 steps Start step number 1 1t
21. uis The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used On off Any function block having digital output on off can be connected to each Input input Unconnected inputs are handled as OFF However all inputs cannot be IN2 On off unconnected Output OUT Output Outputs the result of negative exclusive logical OR IN1 through IN2 2 Parameters 1 BO B199 for the 12 type 2 The result of negative exclusive logical OR on the on off states of the inputs IN1 through IN2 is shown below 2 OUT ejej ojo oje o 7 6 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 7 THE LOGICAL OPERATION NOT Negation Calculates the negation of the input signal and outputs the result Symbol IN 1 O OUT Operation The NOT FB outputs the result of negating the input signal ON OFF Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Numb B Block to B999 1 umber ock rumpen The block number be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used Input IN On off Any function block having digital
22. bit bit bit bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 EEEE HEHHEHE January to December 1st to 31st e Month Week Day of the week Data register one word k Reserved Month setting Reserved Week setting Day of the week setting bit bit bit bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Haas Tt ee TT January to December 1st to 5th Last Sunday to Saturday Allocation to week setting Allocation to day of the week setting binary decimal binary decimal 001000 8 1st 000 0 Sunday 010000 16 2nd 001 1 Monday 011000 24 3rd 010 2 Tuesday 100000 32 4th 011 3 Wednesday 101000 40 5th 100 4 Thursday 110000 48 Last 101 5 Friday 110 6 Saturday i 3 1 DEC SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 19 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB e Month End of month Reserved Month setting Reserved o l 13 20 bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 bit 8 January to December SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 bit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 bit 0 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER Example day of the week settings When configured to turn on the output on January ist January 1st Reserved Month setting Reserved bit Day setting bit bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
23. 1 When using single pulse output mode the 40 type 016 017 is used as the control direction port Therefore PULS3 PWM3 or PULS4 PWM4 cannot be used 2 Outputs the on off state of the control direction input 3 When using RAMP1 in dual pulse output mode RAMP2 or ARAMP2 cannot be used 10 Control direction Stores the on off state of the control direction input This data register is read only The control direction value 0 1 cannot be changed using the data register 11 Preset value This setting configures the total number of output pulses in the range of 1 to 100 000 000 12 Current value The number of pulses output from the pulse output port is stored in this data register The current value is updated when the RAMP FB is executed at each scan 15 14 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 15 THE PULSE 13 Error status If a configuration error occurs when the RAMP FB execution input turns from off to on M8004 user program execution error is turned on and the error code is stored in this register Error code Status 0 Normal 2 Initial pulse frequency The initial pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 10 000 in operation mode 0 designation error The initial pulse frequency was not set between 20 and 10 000 in operation mode 1 3 Preset value designation error The preset value was not set between 1 to 100 000 000 4 Steady pulse frequency The steady puls
24. Abbreviation Meaning FB Function block For example the AND logical AND function block is described as AND FB FBD Function block diagram Preface 4 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 j DEC TABLE OF CONTENTS Cures 1 Carrer 2 Carrer 3 Cures 4 Cures 5 Carrer 6 7 Carrer 8 Aie M Preface 1 About This Manual Preface 2 Related 4 Preface 3 Names and Abbreviations Used in this Preface 4 Operation Basics Starting WindLDR and PLC Selection Creating EET CONVENE PROGKAM 25 EEUU SINE E EUER Download AS RR ER UC Sei RR EAR AERE ennreseb cin LEUTE Quit WINGLDR Basic Operations on the Module 2 1 Device Addresses Device Adresses 3 1 Special Internal Relays ii
25. Cancel 1 Data register settings Select constant settings or indirect designation with data registers for the YEAR FB date configuration To configure the dates as constant settings clear this check box Cleared check box The dates are configured permanently The dates are configured on the parameter tabs The dates cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For the settings see Parameter tab on page 13 15 Note When this check box is selected the settings for dates are indirectly specified with data registers Configure the dates by using data registers In this case the dates can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For indirection designation with data registers see Configuring the dates by specifying data registers on page 13 17 2 S1 First Data Register This setting is not configured when configuring the dates as constant settings 3 INI Initialization Input This setting is not configured when configuring the dates as constant settings 4 S2 The number of parameter tabs Specify the number of parameter tabs When this value is increased or decreased the number of parameter tabs displayed on the dialog box increases or decreases The eight bytes of the user program area are used for each parameter tab For the settings see Parameter tab on page 13 15 13 14 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 n DEC Mu 5 Pulse Output 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB Select the operation of the
26. Day ON Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday 1 ON settings This section configures the day of the week and the time to turn on the output The output is turned on at the specified time for the specified day of the week Settings Content Range Day of the week Specifies the days of the week oer Hour 0 to 23 ON time Enters the time Set the time in a range from 00 00 to 23 59 Minute 0 to 59 2 OFF settings This section configures the day of the week and the time to turn off the output The output is turned off at the specified time for the specified day of the week Settings Content Range Day of the week Specifies the days of the week m Hour 0 to 24 OFF time Enters the time Set the time in a range from 00 00 to 24 00 Minute to 59 Notes e When the time is duplicated in the settings on other tabs the settings on the tab with the larger tab number are valid For example if ON time is 8 00 and OFF time is 9 00 on the P 1 tab and ON time is 9 00 and OFF time is 10 00 on the P 2 tab the 9 00 setting is duplicated on the 2 tabs and OFF time for the P 1 tab is disabled In this situation the output is on from 8 00 to 10 00 Settings on the P 1 tab ON Settings on the P 2 tab OFF Time 7 00 8 00 9 00 10 00 ON time s OFF time N OFF OFF time 11 00 13 4 ON 1 Output I i OFF
27. The initialization input is only used for indirect designation of the WEEK FB settings with data registers Output OUT Output Outputs the results according to the comparison of the current day of the week and time with the configured day of the week and time Data registers setting Enabled Disabled Select constant settings or indirect designation with data registers for the WEEK FB day of the week and time configuration If the data registers setting is disabled constant setting is selected Parameters Pulse output Enabled Disabled When pulse output is enabled output is turned on for one scan at the ON settings time When the execution input turns from off to on according to the comparison of the current day of the week and time with ON setting the output is turned on for one scan When pulse output is disabled the output turns on or off according to the ON settings and OFF settings 51 Starting data register D0000 to 00997 D1000 to D1997 Depends on the number of parameter tabs 3 Specify the start of the data register area to store the days of the week and time settings for the WEEK FB Starting from the specified data register 3 x N N number of parameter tabs consecutive data registers are allocated Specify only when indirect designation of the WEEK FB settings with data register is selected 52 Number of parameter tabs 1 BO to B199 can be used for the 12
28. To turn on output 0000 Tuesday Wednesday and Saturday each week from 20 30 to 1 15 the next day Parameter tab WEEK Weekly Timer Devices P1 settings Day of the week 7 Sunday 7 Monday ON time hh mm OFF settings Day of the week 17 Sunday E Monday OFF time hh mm E Preview Week Day E Tuesday Wednesday F Tuesday Wednesday ursday Friday Thursday F Friday V Saturday 7 Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Cm Configure the tabs as shown above and connect the WEEK FB output to 0000 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 9 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB To turn on output 0000 Monday Wednesday and Friday each week from 6 00 to 9 00 15 00 to 18 00 and 22 00 to 0 00 the next day Parameter tab Configure the settings using 3 tabs On tab 1 configure the output to turn on Monday Wednesday and Friday from 6 00 to 9 00 On tab 2 configure the output to turn on Monday Wednesday and Friday from 15 00 to 18 00 EN WEEK Weekly Timer IE WEEK Weekly Timer Devices es pees ex 92 settings settings Day of the week Day of the week E Sunday V Monday Tuesday 7 Wednesday Thursday V Friday 7 Saturday Sunday 7 Monday Tuesday V Wednesday V Friday 7 S
29. e When the SmartAXIS changes from STOP to RUN the initialize input M8120 turns on When the RAMP FB execution input 10 turns on pulse output starts e When I1 is off SmartAXIS operates the forward direction e When I1 is on SmartAXIS operates in the reverse direction RAMP Ramp Pulse Output EN Devices Settings ramea qooa E S1 Control Register INI Initialization Input D1 Operation Status Tag Name M8120 f Device Address M8120 Comment Initialize Pulse RAMP Ramp Pulse Output E35 Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Operation Mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency 00000 1000 20 to 10 000 increments of 1 10 Hz Initial pulse frequency D0001 50 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0002 2000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Reversible control enable Single pulse output Control direction D0003 Preset value D0004 D0005 100000 1to 100 000 000 Current value D0006 D0007 1to 100 000 000 Error status 00008 Cancel Function Device address Setting value Details Operation Mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency D0000 1000 10 kHz Initial pulse frequency D0001 50 500 Hz Frequency change time D0002 2000 2 000 ms Reversible control enable Single pulse output mode Control direction 0003 Preset value
30. e When the configured number of pulses are output the pulse output stops In this situation M50 turns off M51 turns on and QO turns on If the RAMP1 FB execution input 10 turns off during pulse output pulse output stops If the execution input turns on again the operation starts from the beginning e Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the RAMP1 FB execution input turns from off to on e The state of the initialization input MO are not reflected while the RAMP1 FB execution input 10 is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the execution input DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 17 15 THE PULSE Sample program To output 48 000 pulses with the frequency change function reversible control disabled from Q14 10000 Initialize Pulse e When the SmartAXIS changes from STOP to RUN the initialize input M8120 turns on When the RAMP FB execution input 10 turns on pulse output starts M8120 00000 RAMP Ramp Pulse Output E37 Devices Settings RAMP 1 Q0014 51 Control Register INI initialization Input D1 Operat
31. RSFF RST X 18 3 When the reset input turns on the output turns off 4 6 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDEC Advanced Instruction Applicable SmartAXIS Applicable SmartAXIS 4 FB REFERENCE FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Group Name Symbol AC DC AC DC AC DC AC DC Touch Digital Input I X X X X X X X X X Input Special Internal Relay M X X X X X X X X X Shift Register R X X X X X X X X X Analog Input AI X X X X X X X X X Digital Output Q X X X X X X X X X Output Internal Relay M X X X X X X X X X Logical AND AND X X X X X X X X X Negative Logical AND NAND X X X X X X X X X Logical OR OR X X X X X X X X X Negative Logical OR NOR X X X X X X X X X Logical Exclusive Logical OR XOR X X X X X X X X X Operation Negative Exclusive Logical OR XNOR X X X X X X X X X Negation NOT X X X X X X X X X Shot up SOTU X X X X X X X X X Shot down SOTD X X X X X X X X X Truth Table TRUTH X X X X X X X X X On delay Count Up Timer TIMU X X X X X X X X X On delay Count Down Timer TIMD X X X X X X X X X Off delay Count Up Timer TIMOU X X X X X X X X X Timer Off delay Count Down Timer TIMOD X X X X X X X X X On off delay Timer TIMCU X X X X X X X X X Single Shot Pulse SPULS X X X X X X X X X Dual Timer DTIM X X X X X X X X X Random Pulse Output RPULS X X X X X X X X X Adding Co
32. The timer number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The timer number can be changed to a desired number However the timer numbers already used in any other Timer FBs cannot be used Input TRG Execution input On off When the execution input turns on the current value returns to the preset value and the output turns on While the execution input is on the output is on When the execution input turns off the counting starts While the execution input is off the current value is decremented until it reaches 0 RST Reset input On off The reset input has priority over the execution input When the reset input is on the output is off regardless of the on off state of the execution input When unconnected the reset input is handled as off Output OUT Output When the current value is larger than 0 the output is on When the current value is 0 the output is off Parameters TP Preset value 0 to 65 535 Specify the time interval off delay time from when the execution input turns off to when the output turns off The preset value can be specified using a constant or a data register 2 TU Time unit 1 sec 100 ms 10 ms 1 ms Specify the time unit for the timer 1 TO to T99 for the 12 I O type 2 The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register spe
33. lt A A On delay time Off delay time 1 1 On delay time Fog Change in on delay elapsed time On delay time 0 Change in off delay elapsed time Off delay time 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 1 1 1 D The output does not turn on since the execution input is on for a shorter time than the on delay time 1 1 1 pgs ess 1 1 1 1 1 The output does not turn off since the execution input is off for a shorter time than the off delay time Sia nies decies te On delay time Off delay time When the reset input is on the timer does not start While the reset input RST is off and the output OUT is off the current value on delay elapsed time starts being incremented when the execution input turns on While the execution input is on the current value on delay elapsed time is incremented and when it reaches the on delay time TP1 the output OUT turns on While the reset input is off the current value off delay elapsed time starts being incremented when the execution input turns off Even after the execution input turns off the output keeps on until the current value off delay elapsed time reaches the off delay time TP2 When the current value off delay elapsed time reaches the off delay time TP2 the output turns off While the off d
34. 0to3 16 Step options on page 15 32 Starting number 7 Next step number 1 to 18 17 Next step number on page 15 32 Step 2 6 words Starting number 8 Steady pulse frequency Mode 0 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments 13 Steady pulse frequency on page 15 32 Mode 1 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments Starting number 13 Next step number 1 to 18 17 Next step number on page 15 32 Step N 6 words Starting number 2 Nx6 6 Steady pulse frequency Mode 0 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments Mode 1 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments 13 Steady pulse frequency on page 15 32 Starting number 7 Nx6 6 Next step number 1 to 18 17 Next step number on page 15 32 1 The upper and lower data registers switch according to the setting of the 32 bit data storage method For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 15 28 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 ZIDEC 3 INI Initialization Input INI specifies the initialization input When the initialization input is on the initial values configured in the Settings tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers The bit device such as an external input 10 to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data r
35. 8 20 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 9 THE COUNTER The counter FBs count the input pulses or measure the ON time of an input compare the current value with the preset value and output the comparison result CNT Adding Counter The CNT FB increments the current value by one when the up clock input turns on The output turns on when the current value is equal to or greater than the preset value Symbol RST CNT OUT UP Operation description When the reset input RST is off the CNT FB can count the input pulses While the CNT FB is in countable state the CNT FB increments the current value by one at every rising edge in the up clock input UP When the current value reaches the preset value counting is stopped and the output OUT is maintained until the reset input is turned on When the reset input is on the current value is reset to 0 and the output is turned off Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each counter FB The counter number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The counter number can be changed to a desired number However the counter numbers already used in any other counter FBs cannot be used The reset input is executed with a higher precedence than the up clock input RST Reset input On off When the reset input is on the current value is reset to z
36. 8 inputs D8167 to D8174 54 SMARTAXTS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDEC Product series Analog input terminal Special data register Touch Relay output type Touch Transistor output type 10 to 2 inputs 110 to 8 inputs 120 to AI27 8 inputs AI30 to AI37 8 inputs AIO to 2 inputs AI2 to AI3 2 inputs to AI5 2 inputs 110 to 8 inputs AI20 to AI27 8 inputs AI30 to AI37 8 inputs Operation Example of the linear conversion Linear conversion Maximum Value after linear conversion Minimum D8040 to D8041 D8149 to D8156 D8158 to D8165 D8167 to D8174 D8040 to D8041 D8176 to D8177 D8186 to D8187 D8149 to D8156 D8158 to D8165 D8167 to D8174 Value before linear conversion 1 000 5 THE INPUT FB Example When the minimum is 5 000 and the maximum is 10 000 an analog input value of 600 is linearly converted into 4 000 10 000 4 000 5 000 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 5 5 5 THE INPUT 5 6 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 6 THE OUTPUT This chapter describes the output FB of the SmartAXIS series Q Digital Output Outputs the state on off input to the FB to the specified external output Symbol IN Operation OUT The digital output FB outputs the on off state of the input IN to the specified external output
37. D1 Operation Status D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with the ZRN1 and ZRN2 FBs These ZRN FBs use 2 consecutive internal relays starting from the specified internal relay The range of available internal relay number is MO to M1270 Caution The first digit of the internal relay number must be 0 not 1 to 7 Otherwise the ZRN FB will not operate correctly Storage Function Setting details destination This relay remains on during pulse output This relay turns off Starting 0 Pulse output OFF y 9P Pulse output when pulse output stops or when the deceleration signal turns off number 0 1 Pulse output ON and pulse output completes This relay turns on when the deceleration signal turns off and Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output not complete y 9 pulse output has completed number 1 complete 1 Pulse output complete i This relay turns off when pulse output starts 1 The pulse output complete on off state is reflected the PULS FB output OUT However when the execution input is off the ZRN FB output OUT is off Parameter tab ZRN Zero Return a Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Initial operation mode 6 1 Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Initial pulse frequency 7 100 1 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Creep operation mode 8 1 Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Creep pulse frequency 9 1 100 1 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Error status 10 Cancel
38. FT1A 24 Function Counter number Range to C197 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X Description Unique number to identify each counter FB The counter number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The counter number can be changed to a desired number However the counter numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used EN Execution input On off When the reset input is off and the execution input is on the ON time hours minutes seconds of the execution input is measured and accumulated When the reset input is on the ON time of the execution input is not measured Input RST Reset input On off The reset input is executed with a higher precedence than the execution input When the reset input is the accumulated ON time is reset to 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds and the output is turned off When unconnected the reset input is handled as off Output OUT Comparison output When the accumulated ON time of the execution input is equal to or greater than the preset value the output is turned on CP Preset value 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds to 65535 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds The preset value can be specified as constants or data registers The value can be specified as a constant or a data register Parameters OP Operation mode 1 COto C97 for the 12 I O type 2 Three consecutive counters starting with the specified counter n
39. If ON time is 9 00 and OFF time is 10 00 on the P 1 tab and ON time is 8 00 and OFF time is 9 00 on the P 2 tab the 9 00 setting is duplicated on the 2 tabs and ON time for the P 1 tab is disabled In this situation the output is on from 8 00 to 9 00 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 uPreview WEEK Weekly Timer Devices P1 settings Day of the week time hh mm E OFF setings Day of the week euim OFF time hh mm 1 Preview Week Day Sunday V Monday E Tuesday Wednesday Thurs V Tuesday E Wednesday F Thursday Friday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Saturday 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB The preview shows the ON OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs as a time chart The preview can be shown as a week or a day Settings Week Select Week when showing the preview as a week Content Day Select Day when showing preview as day SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 5 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB Configuring the days of the week and the time by specifying data registers The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data registers The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings can be changed while the SmartAXIS is runni
40. The occupied area is determined by the selected range on the LCD screen area or work area If multiple lines are selected the area at the top line in the selected range is used 3 Input Text Directly Directly enter the characters to display A space is also counted as one character The message can be entered up to 24 single byte characters However you cannot enter a number of characters that exceeds the occupied area The message can be entered up to 48 single byte characters 4 Select from Text Manager Select the text to display from the text manager This can be selected only when the scroll is enabled 5 Special Character Enters a special character at the cursor position Select the character to enter on the special characters list window popped up when Special Character is pressed For the special characters see 8 Special Character on page 14 4 6 Insert Overwrite Selects whether to insert or overwrite characters when entering new characters DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 7 14 THE INTERFACE FB Insert Bar Graph The value of the specified device can be displayed as a bar graph on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD Insert Bar Graph EA 1 Device wee oo Word W k 3 Maximum 0 E 4 Minimum D Origin of 6 Occupied Area Row xColumn 1x24 E Blinking Settings Upper Limit 7 Lower Limit Cancel 1
41. The special internal relay FB outputs the on off state of the special internal relay Specify a special internal relay number to the FB Note For special internal relay numbers and functions see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Internal relay M8000 to Unique number a identify the special internal relay funcion block Number M Specify a special internal relay number However the special internal relay number M8177 3 men numbers already used in any other special internal relay FBs cannot be used Input Output OUT Output Outputs the on off state of the specified special internal relay Parameters x 5 2 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDEC R Shift Register A function block to use the state on off of a shift register Symbol OUT Operation 5 THE INPUT FB The shift register FB outputs the on off state of the shift register Specify a shift register number to the FB Note Operations on the shift register are performed with the SFR FB For the SFR FB see The shift register FB on page 10 1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Shift register Unique number to identify the shift register function block Number R to R127 Specify a shift register number H
42. Up Down Selection Reversible Counter HOUR Hour Meter CD I STIL The shift register FB SER SHIP 10 1 The comparison FB 11 1 ygresestedniagi sg N 11 3 0 225 2 2 222 2 11 5 The data conversion FB ALT Alternate OUEDUE 5 5 25 2 eap cs oponen teme RIP 12 1 The week programmer FB WEEK Weekly TIMED Eo reote E erase FERES Eo De eek ba 13 1 YEAR alu 13 12 The interface FB Menus H 14 1 The pulse FB PULS Pulse OQUEDUE ME 15 1 PWM Pulse Width Modulatiom 222 15 6 5 cete tu e eg sec puc
43. When DIR Direction input On off the direction input is on the bits are shifted in descending order Unconnected inputs are handled as OFF Output OUT Output Output the state of the bit shifted out ME en RO to R127 The start shift register of the bits to be shifted register Parameters Number of N constituent 1 to 128 The number of shift registers to be shifted Specify a constant value bits 1 to B199 for the 12 I O type IDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 10 1 10 THE SHIFT REGISTER FB Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T cc B D AI Constant TRG Execution input X X X X X X X RST Reset input X X X X X X X DI Data input X X X X X X X DIR Direction input X X X X X X X St i R art shift B S X register Number of N umber o X constituent bits Operation Example Example 1 When the direction input DIR is off and the execution input TRG is turned on the shift registers as many as the number of constituent bits starting with the specified shift register are shifted by 1 bit in ascending order The state of the data input DI is stored in the LSB least significant bit of the shift registers Output OUT is the state of the bit shifted out Start shift register R RO Ro Data input DI R15 1 1 11110 4 1 V
44. When comparison value 1 comparison value 2 When comparison value 1 comparison value 2 When comparison value 1 lt comparison value 2 When comparison value 1 gt comparison value 2 When comparison value 1 gt comparison value 2 When comparison value 1 lt comparison value 2 lt When comparison value 1 lt comparison value 2 When comparison value 1 gt comparison value 2 Kk i Valid Devices When comparison value 1 gt comparison value 2 When comparison value 1 comparison value 2 Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP cc B D AI Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X X DAT1 Comparison value 1 X X X X X x X DAT2 Comparison value 2 X X X X X x X 1 For the Pro Lite and Touch relay output type an analog input FB be specified only when I integer is specified as the data type For the Touch transistor output type an analog input FB can be specified only when W word or I integer is specified as the data type 11 2 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE STTG Schmitt Trigger Compares the comparison value and the ON threshold OFF threshold and turns the output on or off according to the comparison result Symbol EN STTG DATA ON OFF Operation OUT 11 THE COMPARISON FB When the execution input EN is on the comparison value DATA is compared with the ON threshold and the OFF threshold and the
45. amp up down amp right ESC and OK are available to use SmartAXIS Touch The Touch can be operated using the buttons displayed on the LCD Button Operations Edit Program External Memory System menu screen imo iem ooooooo Configurations imm MES 55 550000 0056000000 5566 amp 5 T a Operation buttons Maintenance x System Mode Device Monitor Brightness Ladder Monitor Ladder Start Stop Maintenance Screen Maintenance x System Mode Device Monitor Brightness Ladder Monitor Ladder Start Stop The button operations differ when the button is pressed and released and when the button is pressed and held Press Hold Operation Press The button is pressed for 0 1 seconds or more and less than 2 seconds and then released Press and hold The button is pressed for 2 seconds or more and then released SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 2 1 2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE MODULE 2 2 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Introduction This chapter describes device addresses available for the SmartAXIS Pro Lite to program FBD Special internal relays and speci
46. such as to delay the change of an output state for a specified time interval or to output pulses in accordance with configured values TIMU On delay Count Up Timer When the execution input turns on counting starts and the current value is incremented When the elapsed time reaches the specified on delay time the output turns on Symbol TRG TIMU OUT TRG TIMU OUT 1 sec 100 ms TRG TIMU OUT TRG TIMU OUT 10 ms 1 ms Operation When the execution input TRG is off the current value is 0 and the output OUT is off When the execution input turns on the current value starts being incremented While the execution input is on the current value is incremented and when it reaches the preset value TP the counting stops and the output turns on After the counting stops the current value is held and the output keeps on until the execution input turns off Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify the Timer function block The timer number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Number T Timer umber The timer number be changed to a desired number However the timer numbers already used in any other timer FBs cannot be used Execution When the execution input turns on counting starts While the execution Input TRG input On off input is on the current value is incremented
47. 0 0 0 1 Month setting 0001 1 Day setting 00001 1 The value of the data register is 100000001 binary 257 decimal When configured to turn on the output on December 31st December 31st Reserved Month setting Reserved bit Day setting bit bit bit 15 14 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 9 0 0911 1 0 0 8 9 9411111 1 1 Month setting 1100 12 Day setting 11111 31 The value of the data register is 110000011111 binary 3103 decimal When configured to turn on the output on the 1st Monday of January 1st Monday of January Reserved bit Month setting Reserved Week setting bit bit 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 e ojo ojo ojo o o ojo 1 0 0 1 Month setting 0001 1 January Week setting 001 1 1st Day of the week setting 001 1 Monday The value of the data register is 100001001 binary 265 decimal Day of the week setting bit 4th Thursday of June When configured to turn on the output on the 4th Thursday of June Reserved bit Month setting bit Reserved bit Week setting Day of the week setting Month setting 0110 6 June Week setting 100 4 4th Day of the week setting 100 4 Thursday 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 0 9 9 0 1 1 0 8 0 1 0 0 01 0 value of the data register is 11000100100 binary 1572 d
48. 1 Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are output and output completes Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when pulse output has completed number 1 complete 1 Pulse output complete This relay is off during pulse output This relay is off when the pulse output frequency is Starting Pulse output 0 Steady pulse output steady number 2 state 1 Changing output pulse frequency This relay is on when the pulse output frequency is changing When pulse counting is enabled this relay turns on Starting 0 Overflow not occurred 9 Overflow when pulses are output more than the configured number 3 1 Overflow occurred preset value 1 The pulse output complete on off state is reflected in the RAMP FB output OUT output OUT is off Parameter tab However when the execution input is off the RAMP FB RAMP Ramp Pulse Output Devices Settings Function DR Setting Operation Mode 5 Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Steady pulse frequency 6 1 100 Initial pulse frequency 7 100 Frequency change time 8 2 100 Reversible control enable 9 1 Disabled Control direction 1 0 P Preset value 11 100000000 Current value 1 2 Error status 1 3 T Description 1to 10 000 in increments of 1Hz 1to 10 000 in increments of 1Hz 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms 1to 100 000 000 1to 100 000 000 merui Cancel 5 Operation Mode Sele
49. 22 23 7 29 30 31 2 25 25 27 28 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 5 Configure the tabs as shown above and connect the YEAR FB output to Q000 To turn on output Q000 on the last day of every month between 2013 and 2020 January February March April ON date 2013 end of month E a E r S OFF date 2020 end of month OFF one day 2 Yearly setting ON 3ith 15 28th 29th ist 31th ist 30th ist Monthly setting ON Parameter tab YEAR Yearly Timer Devices P1 ON settings E Monthy Year 2013 Month and Day Settings Month Oday 18 Day of the week 9 End of month OFF settings ven o2 E 38 Specify ON duration 18 mul February 2013 2013 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 1 2 7 8 9 B 1n D 3456789 3456789 143005 46 7 18 19 DR ws 16 10 H1 22 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 2 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 27 28 29 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 m Configure the tabs as shown above connect the YEAR FB output to 0000 DEC SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 25 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB configure the dates by specifying data registers To turn on 0000 from 0 00 on September 1 2011 to 0 00 on June 25 2013 2011 2012 2013 2014 ON date 2011 09 01 OFF date
50. 3 Start nter C 4 art counter O OFF threshold Start counter C 5 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 9 5 9 THE COUNTER FB Notes 9 6 Counters C already used in other counter FBs cannot be used When the current value of the up down selection reversible counter is the maximum 65 535 or 4 294 967 295 the current value cannot be incremented When the current value of the up down selection reversible counter is 0 the current value cannot be decremented Turn on the preset input at least once before start using the up down reversible counter If the preset input is never turned on the current value will contain an unknown value The preset values can be changed by external devices such as operator interfaces WindLDR and LCD and buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro Touch The changed preset values are stored in the RAM and the changes are not reflected to the user program saved in the ROM When the SmartAXIS is turned off the changed preset values are reset to the original values stored in the ROM For details on how to store the changed preset values to the user program in ROM CNT Adding Counter on page 9 1 Store the preset values to the user program in the ROM using WindLDR SmartAXIS Pro Lite only on page 9 2 and Store the preset values to the user program the ROM with button operations on the SmartAXIS on page 9 2 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 9 THE C
51. 59 1 R W OFF time Note R W is the abbreviation for read write When R W it can be read and written When R it can only be read When W it can only be written m Day of the week allocation a data register The day of the week for the ON settings and the day of the week for the OFF settings are allocated as bits in 1 data register as follows Day of the week for the ON settings Day of the week for the OFF settings bit bit bit bit 15 14 13 12 1 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Thursday Wednesday Sunday Reserved Saturday Thursday Wednesday v Data register one word 0 Disabled check box cleared 1 Enabled check box selected Example day of the week settings To configure the output to turn on Monday and to turn off Friday The ON setting is enabled on Monday the OFF setting is enable on Friday ON settings OFF settings i 14 13 12 11 10 9 E 6 5 4 3 2 1 Fi 1 1 10 Ml v o o Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Day of the week setting ON 0000010 Day of the week setting OFF 0100000 The value of the data register is 1000100000 binary 544 decimal To configure the output to turn on Monday and Thursday and to turn off Tuesday and Saturday The ON settings are enabled on Monday and Thursday the OFF settings are enabled on Tue
52. 8006 Remote I O Slave 2 Communication Error Operating Cleared Read M8007 Remote I O Slave 3 Communication Error Operating Cleared Read M8010 In Daylight Saving Time Period System version 1 10 or later Operating Cleared Read Reserved M8013 Calendar Clock Data Write Adjust Error Flag Operating Cleared Read M8014 Calendar Clock Data Read Error Flag Operating Cleared Read M8015 Reserved M8016 Calendar Data Write Flag Operating Cleared Write M8017 Clock Data Write Flag Operating Cleared Write M8020 Calendar Clock Data Write Flag Operating Cleared Write M8021 Clock Data Adjust Flag Operating Cleared Write an Reserved 8025 Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped Maintained Cleared Read Write M8026 SD Memory Card Status Maintained Cleared Read M8027 SD Memory Card Writing Flag Maintained Cleared Read M8030 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read M8031 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read M8032 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read M8033 Reset Status Maintained Cleared Read High speed Counter Group 1 10 M8034 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read M8035 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read M8036 Underflow Maintained Cleared Read M8037 Count Direction Maintained Cleared Read M8040 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read M8041 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read M8042 High speed Counter Group 2 I2 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read M8043 Comparison ON Status Maintained Clea
53. D8028 D8027 Port 2 Slave Number D8028 Port 3 Slave Number For details on maintenance communication see Chapter 9 Maintenance Communication Maintenance Communication via Expansion Communication Port in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For details on Modbus slaves see Chapter 11 Modbus Communication Modbus Communication via RS 232C RS 485 in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For SmartAXIS Touch maintenance communication and Modbus RTU slaves see Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Reading Error Data in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual D8029 System Software Version The PLC system software version number is stored to D8029 This value is indicated in the PLC status dialog box called from the WindLDR menu bar Select Online gt Monitor gt Monitor then select Online gt Status See Chapter 13 Troubleshooting Reading Error Data in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual D8030 Communication Adapter Information Information about the communication adapters installed on the port 2 and port 3 connectors is stored to D8030 Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 8 7 1 0 D8030 010 tft Port 3 Port 2 0 RS232C communication adapter is installed 1 RS485 communication adapter is installed or no communication adapter is installed D8031 Optional Cartridge Information Information about the optional cartridge installed on the SmartAXIS is stored to D8031 Bit Bit Bit Bit
54. Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step 2 Steady pulse frequency 00020 20 20 to 10 000 increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0021 3000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Step 3 Preset value D0022 D0023 5000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction D0024 Reverse Acceleration deceleration contral D0024 Acceleration deceleration first Next step number 00025 0 0104 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D0020 20 200 Hz Frequency change time D0021 3000 3 000 msec Preset value D0022 D0023 5000 Preset value 5 000 Control direction 0024 Reverse Reverse 1 Acceleration deceleration control D0024 Acceleration deceleration first Acceleration deceleration first 0 Next step number D0025 0 Step 0 end DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 41 15 THE PULSE This section describes example program that outputs pulses as shown below with the frequency change function single pulse output reversible control disabled using the following settings The pulses are output from Q14 100 kHz Interrupt step Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Preset value 100 000 Preset value 100 000 Preset value 1 000 000 Preset value 1 000 000 Preset value 100 000 50 kHz 1
55. FB that can be programmed in a user program is 48 However make sure that the folder name specified by the DLOG FB is not conflicted with any folder names specified by the other DLOG FB When the folders are conflicted log data with a mixed format is output to the same CSV file e While the execution input to DLOG FB is on log data is repeatedly output to the CSV file When you want to output the log data only one time add a SOTU Shot up or SOTD FB Shot down function block to the input condition For SOTU or SOTD FB see The logical operation FB on page 7 1 SOTU Shot Up on page 7 8 and SOTD Shot Down on page 7 9 e The data writing process to the SD memory card for the DLOG FB takes several scans Once a DLOG FB is executed the process continues until the log data transfer is complete regardless of any change in the execution input to DLOG FB While the log data is being written to the SD memory card the DLOG FB is not executed even when the execution input to DLOG FB is turned on To execute the DLOG FB again confirm that the previous data transfer process has finished and then execute the DLOG FB Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block Number B Block numer BO to B999 The block number is automatically assigned in order Mom 0 but it can also be changed to the desired number However
56. FBs cannot be used When the execution input is on pulses are output from the pulse output EN Execution input On off port according to the control register S1 settings When the execution input turns off the pulse output stops INI Initialization On off When the initialization input is on the initial values configured in the Settings Input input tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers If reversible control is enabled when the control direction input is on DIR Control direction On off reverse operation input When the control direction input is off forward operation When unconnected handled as off Output OUT Output When the pulse output has completed the output turns on and keeps on Pulse output Specify the pulse output port number for the RAMP FB The pulse output port number RAMPI RAMP2 port differs with RAMP1 and RAMP2 Si Control redister DO to D991 Specify the starting number of the data registers to use with the RAMP FB Parameters 9 D1000 to 01991 Starting from the specified data register 9 consecutive data registers are used Specify the starting number of the internal relays to use with the RAMP FB D1 Operation status MO to M1270 Starting from the specified internal relay 4 consecutive internal relays are used 1 The bit device such as an external input 10 to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial
57. FT9Y B1386 The least significant digit of input output internal relay and special internal relay device address is an octal number 0 through 7 Upper digits Out of data registers DO through 01999 D1000 through D1999 cannot be designated as keep types Retained in STOPS RUN but cleared For SmartAXIS Pro Lite when you use data register ROM backup you can initialize the data registers with the values backed up in ROM For 3 1 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Special Internal Relays Special internal relays M8000 through M8177 are used for controlling the CPU operation and communication and for indicating CPU status All special internal relays cannot be used as destinations of advanced instructions Internal relays M300 through M335 are used to read input device status of the IOREF I O refresh instruction Note Do not change the status of reserved special internal relays otherwise the SmartAXIS may not operate correctly Special Internal Relay Device Addresses Description Nd d Power OFF Read Write M8000 Start Control Maintained Maintained Read Write M8001 1 sec Clock Reset Cleared Cleared Write M8002 All Outputs OFF Cleared Cleared Write M8003 Reserved M8004 User Program Execution Error Cleared Cleared Read M8005 Remote I O Slave 1 Communication Error Operating Cleared Read
58. Give the project a name and save it From the Application menu eb click Save As gt WindLDR Project TESTOO pjw WINDLDR Organize v New folder Libraries Documents Music a i Pictures Videos Computer Local Disk Local Disk D Name C TESTOO pjw Date modified Type 06 07 2013 12 50 PJW File local Disk Ey 7 4 n File TESTOL pjv Save as type WindLDR Project File pjw Hide Folders The project is saved to the specified file 1 10 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 OPERATION BASICS Simulation Before transferring the user program to the SmartAXIS you can check the operation of the program in WindLDR To check program operation on the SmartAXIS external devices must be connected to the SmartAXIS and inputs must be turned on and off but with the simulation function input I states can also be changed in WindLDR which enables you to check the operation of the program 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Simulation gt Simulation 2 Double click the input FB you wish to change its state 10000 1 sec Clock M8121 e When you turn on both input 10 and input I1 output 00 is turned on e When you turn on either input I1 or input i2 output Q1 is turned on and off continuously one
59. I O type 2 0000 to 00397 be used for the 12 I O type 3 range that spans 00999 D1000 cannot be set Valid Devices Parameter Function I EN Execution input X 1to 20 TC C CC CP B D AI Specify the number of parameter tabs Constant X mm e X INI Initialization input X X 51 Starting data register x S2 Number of parameter tabs 1 Special data registers cannot be used 13 2 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDEC 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB Settings There are two methods to configure the day of the week and the time for the WEEK FB Specify the method on the Device tab with Data register settings e Configuring the day of the week and the time as constant settings The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings are uniquely determined The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For details see Configuring the day of the week and the time as constant settings on page 13 3 e Configuring the day of the week and the time by specifying data registers The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data registers The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For details see Configuring the days of the wee
60. Logical OR XOR N1 1 OUT Implements exclusive logical OR for a maximum of two input signals E 7 5 n ON OFF and outputs the result Negative Exclusive Logical OR XNOR Implements negative exclusive logical OR for a maximum of two B 7 6 IN d input signals ON OFF and outputs the result Negation NOT IN 1 Outputs the result of negating the input signal ON OFF 7 7 Shot up IN j SOTU Turns on the output for one scan when the input signal turns from SOTU 7 8 off to on Shot down 4 SOTD Turns on the output for one scan when the input signal turns from SOTD 7 9 on to off Truth Table TRUTH A truth table for the output can be configured corresponding to the TRUTH icm 9 16 patterns combination of the four input signals and TRUTH FB x 7 10 IN3 outputs the result according to the table IN4 4 2 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 4 FB REFERENCE Timer FB Output 5 Refer to Inversion Symbol Name and Diagram Function On delay Count Up Timer TIMU After the execution input turns the output turns on when TIMU 100 ms on delay time elapses The current value is incremented from zero 8 1 to the preset value On delay Count Down Timer After the execution input turns the output turns on when the TIMD TIMD 100 ms on delay time elapses The current value is decremented from the 8 5
61. OFF ON time minimum ON time minimum ON time minimum i i i i ON time maximum ON time maximum ON time maximum lt gt lt gt lt gt Cycle Cycle Cycle If continuance is selected as the operation mode the on off operation of pulse output i e pulse output is repeated at the specified cycle TP3 while the execution input is on The output turns on for a random time within the range of time between ON time minimum and ON time maximum and then the output turns off for the remaining time of the cycle When the execution input turns off the output turns off Notes e When ON time maximum TP1 lt ON time minimum TP2 a user program execution error occurs and the output turns off e When the cycle TP3 lt ON time maximum 1 a user program execution error occurs and the output turns off e When the ON time maximum is set to 1 the ON time minimum is set to 0 and the cycle is set to 1 the output repeatedly and randomly turns on or off for the time length of the cycle The output does not turn on and off within the cycle e TO to T197 can be specified for the timer number However for the 12 I O type TO to T97 can be used The random pulse output uses 3 timers Starting from the timer specified by the timer number 3 consecutive timers are used The timer specified with the timer number 0 is allocated for the ON time maximum T1 The timer specified with the timer number 1 is all
62. OFF and outputs the result Truth table IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero 1 Number B lees number BILE Hue The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used IN1 On off IN2 On off Any function block having digital output on off be connected to each Input input Unconnected inputs are handled as OFF However all inputs cannot be IN3 On off unconnected IN4 On off Output OUT Output Outputs the result according to the configured truth table Parameters s1 Truth table On off on off be configured for 16 bit patterns of the IN1 through 1 BO to B199 for the 12 I O type Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R Si Truth table T TC TP B D AI Constant X 7 10 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 8 THE TIMER The timer FBs are used in a variety of ways
63. OPERATION Turns on the output for one scan when the input signal changes from on to off SOTD Shot Down Symbol IN SOTD Operation OUT The SOTD FB turns on the output for one scan when the input signal changes from ON to OFF Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Numbe B Block numbe to B999 1 T ek niumber The block number be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used Input IN On off Any function block having digital output on off be connected The output turns on for an interval of one scan when the input IN changes Output OUT On off um from ON to OFF Parameters 1 BO to B199 for the 12 I O type 2 The timing chart of the SOTD is shown below ON IN OFF Ea fe ON a OUT OFF IDEC lt One scan SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 7 9 7 THE LOGICAL OPERATION FB TRUTH Truth Table Processes the input signals according to the configured truth table and outputs the result Symbol IN1 TRUTH OUT IN2 IN3 IN4 Operation The TRUTH FB turns on the output according to the truth table configured for the bit patterns of a maximum of four input signals ON
64. OR XNOR 2 6 Negative Logical AND NAND 7 2 Negative Logical OR NOR 7 4 Off delay Count Down Timer TIMOD 8 9 Off delay Count Up Timer TIMOU 8 7 On off delay Timer TIMCU 8 11 On delay Count Down Timer TIMD 8 5 On delay Count Up Timer TIMU 8 7 Operation Basics 1 1 Convert Program 1 9 Download Program 1 12 Monitor Operation 1 14 PLC Selection 1 1 Quit WindLDR 7 25 Saving a Project 1 10 Simulation 1 11 Optional Cartridge Information 3 10 PLC Selection 1 1 Power Failure Memory Protection 8 4 Pulse Output PULS 15 1 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 15 6 Quit WindLDR 2 25 Ramp Pulse Output RAMP 15 11 Random Pulse Output RPULS 8 19 Range Comparison RCMP 11 5 Reversible control enable 15 31 RS Flip flop RSFF 18 2 Schmitt Trigger STTG 11 3 Script SCRPT 17 1 SD Memory Card Access Stop Flag 3 5 SD Memory Card Capacity 3 10 Shift Register R 5 2 Shift Register SFR 10 1 Shot Down SOTD 7 9 Shot Up SOTU 78 Simulation 1 11 Single Shot Pulse SPULS 8 14 Special Data Register 3 6 Special Internal Relay SM 5 2 Storage Method of 32 bit Data 4 10 Timer Accuracy 8 3 Truth Table TRUTH 7 10 Up Down Selection Reversible Counter CUD 9 3 USB Connection 1 12 Weekly Timer WEEK 13 1 Yearly Timer YEAR 12 12 Zero Return ZRN 15 21 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 INDEX FB Index A 5 4 ALT 12 1 AND 7 1 ARAMP 15 26 11 1 9 1 CUD 9 3 D
65. Output ON settings Month December OFF settings Month January Day 15 Day 20 Notes A maximum of 10 YEAR FB can be used in a user program e Normally the output is only updated when the current date reaches the ON OFF settings but when the YEAR FB execution input turns from off to on the output state at the current date is updated according to the ON OFF settings For details see Timing Chart when the Execution Input Turns On during the Configured Period on page 13 22 e When pulse output is enabled output is turned for one scan at the instant 0 00 the date changes to the ON settings date When the YEAR FB execution input turns on according to the comparison of the current date with ON settings the output is turned on for one scan For pulse output see 5 Pulse Output on page 13 15 or 13 18 e When the yearly setting and monthly setting are enabled and a date that does not exist depending on the month or year is set for the ON setting or the OFF setting the output turns on or off on the first day of the following month e When the year data is outside the range of 2000 to 2099 the month data is outside the range of 1 to 12 the day data is outside the range of 1 to 31 the week data is outside the range of 1 to 6 1st week to 5th week or last week or the day of the week data is outside the range of 0 to 6 a user program execution error will occur e For user program execution error
66. Pulse output complete M0051 Pulse output status M0052 e When the ARAMP1 FB execution input changes from off to on pulses are output from Q14 according to the settings configured by the data registers The reversible control signal is output from Q16 or Q12 e When pulse output starts M50 turns on M52 turns on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing e The pulses increase according to the frequency change time until they reach the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency e When the configured number of pulses are output the pulses stop In this situation M50 turns off and M51 turns on e If the ARAMP1 FB execution input turns off during pulse output pulse output is stopped If this input turns on again the operation starts from the beginning e Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected the pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the ARAMP1 FB is started e You cannot change between forward and reverse until the pulse output pulse frequency is set to its minimum In mode 1 for example you cannot change between forward and reverse until the pulse frequency is set to 200 Hz The changes from the initialization input MOO are not reflected while the ARAMP1 FB execution input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input 00 on after turnin
67. Q0014 1 4 51 Control Register INI Initialization Input DE DecelerationInput D1 OperationStatus 4 5 Tag Name Device Address D Comment Cancel 1 ZRN FB selection Select the ZRN FB from ZRN1 or ZRN2 The pulse output port differs by the ZRN FB ZRN FB Pulse output port ZRN1 Q14 ZRN2 Q15 2 S1 Control Register S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with the ZRN1 and ZRN2 FBs Starting from the specified data register 3 consecutive data registers are used The range of available data registers is 00 to 0997 and D1000 to D1997 Storage Function Setting details Reference destination Starting m Operation mode 0 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments 7 Initial pulse frequency on page Initial pulse frequen number o 7 puise frequency Operation mode 1 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments 15 23 Starting Operation mode 0 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments 9 Creep pulse frequency on page Cree Ise freque number 1 TCSP puise frequency Operation mode 1 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments 15 23 Stern Error status 0 2 10 Error status on page 15 23 number 2 3 INI Initialization Input INI specifies the initialization input When the initialization input is on the initial values configured in the Settings tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers The bit device such as an external input 10 to 1155 or an
68. Ramp Table ARAMP 1 Q0014 51 Register INI Initialization Input INT Interrupt Input D1 Monitor Register 02 Operation Status Tag Name 00000 E D0020 00000 8120 D0020 Mooso ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table eax Devices Settings Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description Operation mode Mode 0 1 Hzto 10kHz 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz 7 T55 Reversible control enable Disabled UE INumber of steps 3 11018 steps Start step number 1 1103 step interrupt step number 00000 1 1 to 3 step Function Device address Setting value Details Operation mode Mode 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz Reversible control enable Disabled Number of steps 3 Start step number 1 Step 1 Interrupt step number 0000 15 36 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 THE PULSE Step 1 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table S Devices Settings Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description step 2 Steady pulse frequency 00002 100 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Frequency change time 00008 2000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value 00004 00005 4000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction 00006 Acceleration deceleration control 00006 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number D0007 2 0 to 3 step Cancel Functi
69. SmartAXIS is designed for use in Europe Do not disassemble repair or modify the SmartAXIS modules e The SmartAXIS contains electronic parts and batteries When disposing of the SmartAXIS do so in accordance lt gt with national and local regulations O DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 Preface 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This user s manual describes functions specifications installation and operation basics of the SmartAXIS Also included is information on the powerful communications tools of the SmartAXIS as well as troubleshooting procedures Publication history August 2013 First Edition October 2013 Second Edition August 2014 Third Edition Caution contents of this manual and the SmartAXIS and WindLDR applications are copyright and all rights are reserved by IDEC Corporation Unauthorized duplication reproduction sales transfers or leasing is prohibited contents of this manual and the SmartAXIS and WindLDR applications are subject to change without notice Please contact your vendor IDEC Corporation with any problems regarding the operation of this product Trademarks SmartAXIS is a trademark of IDEC Corporation IMPORTANT INFORMATION Under no circumstances shall IDEC Corporation be held liable or responsible for indirect or consequential damages resulting from the use of or the application of IDEC PLC components individually or in combination with other equipm
70. SmartAXIS is turned off the changed preset values are reset to the original values stored in the ROM For details on how to store the changed preset value to the user program in the ROM see The timer FB Timer on page 8 1 TIMU On delay Count Up Since the timer has advance error or behind error that error may cause a problem depending on the system For details see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer Timer Accuracy on page 8 3 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 THE TIMER TIMCU On off delay Timer When the execution input turns on counting starts When the elapsed time reaches the specified on delay time the output turns on When the execution input turns off counting starts When the elapsed time reaches the specified off delay time the output turns off The on delay and off delay time counting is performed by count up Symbol TRG TIMCU OUT TRG TIMCU OUT RST 1 sec RST 100 ms TRG TIMCU OUT TRG TIMCU OUT RST 10 ms RST 1 ms Operation This FB combines the functions of the on delay count up timer and the off delay count up timer When the execution input TRG turns on while the reset input RST is off the current value on delay elapsed time starts being incremented While the execution input is on the current value on delay elapsed time is incremented and when it reaches the on delay time TP1 the output OUT turns on After that when the execution input tur
71. Specify an external output number as the output number Note The output state of the digital output FB is off at the first scan Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Digital output Unique number to identify the digital output function block Specify an Number Q QO to 0141 external output number However the digital output numbers already used in any other digital output FBs cannot be used Any function block having digital output on off can be connected to th Input IN Input On off function block having digita utpu o off can be e input The on off state of the input IN is output to the external output Output OUT Output Outputs the on off state of the input IN at the previous scan Parameters 1 The range for the output number varies depending on the SmartAXIS type Type Digital Output Q 12 I O type 00 to Q3 4 outputs 24 type 00 to Q7 8 outputs 040 to 061 18 outputs Q80 to 0101 18 outputs 0120 to 0141 18 outputs 40 1 O type 00 to 017 16 outputs Q40 to 061 18 outputs Q80 to 0101 18 outputs 0120 to 0141 18 outputs 48 I O type 00 to 021 18 outputs 040 to 061 18 outputs Q80 to 0101 18 outputs Q120 to 0141 18 outputs Touch 00 to Q3 4 outputs SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 6 1 IDEC 6 THE OUTPUT Internal Relay Ou
72. Steady pulse frequency 00008 1000 20 to 10 000 increments of 1 10 Hz Frequency change time D0009 5000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms value D0010 D0011 100000 1 to 100 000 000 mi Control direction 00012 es Acceleration deceleration contral 00012 Acceleration deceleration later Step 6 Want wien 00013 3 0o 6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D0008 1000 10 kHz Frequency change time D0009 5000 5 000 msec Preset value D0010 D0011 100000 Preset value 100 000 Control direction D0012 Acceleration deceleration control D0012 Acceleration deceleration later Acceleration deceleration later 2 Next step number D0013 3 Step 3 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 43 15 THE PULSE Step 3 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table E3757 Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step2 ISteady pulse frequency D0014 5000 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz 3 Frequency change time D0015 8000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value D0016 D0017 1000000 1 to 100 000 000 Step4 Control direction D0018 pm Acceleration deceleration contral D0018 Acceleration deceleration later ps Next step number 0019 4 06 ste
73. The current value is incremented or decremented by 1 at every rising edge CLK Clock input On off in the clock input Whether to increment or decrement is determined by the on off state of the up down selection input Up down When the up down selection input is on the current value is decremented by 1 U D wi ection input On off at every rising edge in the clock input When the up down selection input is off P the current value is incremented by 1 at every rising edge in the clock input The current value is compared with the ON and OFF thresholds and the result is output Number C Counter number to C197 Output OUT Output B W word 0 to 65 535 n 2 CP1 Initial value D double word When the preset input is on the initial value is stored in the current value 0 to 4 294 967 295 The value can be specified as a constant or a data register W word 0 to 65 535 The ON threshold 2 ON threshold P 2 value be specified as a constant or a data register W word 0 to 65 535 The OFF threshold cre OEE threshold D double word The value can be specified as a constant or a data register 0 to 4 294 967 295 Data type W word If the data type is W the countable range is 0 to 65 535 p D double word If the data type is D the countable range is 0 to 4 294 967 295 1 The valid range differs according to the SmartAXIS type an
74. Valid Devices Parameter Function I 0 R T TC TP CC CP B D Constat TRG Execution input X X X X X X X RST Reset input X X X X X X X TP Preset value X X Timing Chart The output does not turn off since the execution input is off for a shorter time than the off delay time Execution input ON TRG OFF 1 Reset input ON RST OFF Output al OUT OFF A When the reset output does not turn on i When the reset Off delay time input turns on the output turns i off i Off delay time Off delay time When the execution input TRG turns on while the reset input RST is off the current value returns to 0 and the output OUT turns on While the execution input is on the output is on When the execution input turns off the current value starts being incremented Even after the execution input turns off the output keeps on until the current value reaches the preset value TP When the current value reaches the preset value the counting stops and the output turns off While the counting is proceeding if the execution input turns on again the current value returns to 0 When the reset input is on the output is off regardless of the on off state of the execution input Notes TO to T199 be used for the timer number However for the 12 1 type TO to T99
75. X CLK Clock input X X X X X X X U D Up down selection input X X X X X X X 1 Initial value X X CP2 ON threshold X X CP3 OFF threshold X X Timing Chart When the preset input PRST is on the initial value is stored to the current value and the output OUT is turned off When the preset input is off the counter is in the countable state While the counter is in the countable state the counter FB increments or decrements the current value by 1 at every rising edge in the clock input CLK When the up down selection input U D is on the current value is decremented by 1 When the up down selection input U D is off the current value is incremented by 1 The output is turned on or off when the current value is in the following conditions When ON threshold gt OFF threshold The output is turned on when the current value is equal to or greater than the ON threshold The output is turned off when the current value is smaller than the OFF threshold When the up down selection input is When the up down selection input is When the preset input is off and the clock input is turned on on and the clock input is turned on on and the clock input turns on the current value is incremented by 1 the current value is decremented by 1 the counter does not count Preset input PRST Clock input CLK Up down selection input U D Output OUT ON threshold CP2 OFF threshold CP3 Cur
76. You can register up to a maximum of 64 devices the total amount of memory must be less than or equal to 1 024 bytes One byte of memory area is required for each character 9 Remaining size The amount of free memory the difference between the trace data size and 1 024 bytes is shown 10 The number of scans How many scans of trace data can be accumulated with the current trace settings is shown The number of scans of data that can be accumulated depends on the format of the trace data to output If there is little data to output per scan the data for many scans can be accumulated DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 16 11 16 THE DATA LOGGING CSV File Output Format and File Format Configuration The CSV file output format is as follows You can change the separating character for each data and the decimal symbol for floating point numbers that are output to the CSV files on the Function Area Settings dialog box Output format Triggered at 2011 09 07 15 40 30 Scan D0010 D0020 D0030 D0040 D0050 D0060 D0070 D0080 Old 1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 5 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 7 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 New 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 When the TRACE FB is executed and the CSV file for the same date does not exist in the folder designated by S1 a new CSV file is created and the header and the trace data is outpu
77. and displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD according to the value of the specified bit device when on when off Insert Bit Device 9 jesus l 1 Device 2 Display Option E Blinking E Invert 3 Occupied Area Row x Column 1x24 6 7 Special Character Insert 4 Text 5 OFF Text Cancel 1 Device Enter the device to display Valid Devices I Q M R T cc Constant X X X X X X 2 Display Option Configure the options to blink or invert the text For the blinking speed see MSG FB Common Settings on page 14 9 Display Option Description Blinking Blinks the specified text Invert Inverts the display of the specified text 3 Occupied Area Shows the size of the area to be used on the LCD screen Lines 1 columns 1 to 24 The display size is determined by the selected range on the LCD screen area or work area If multiple lines are selected the area at the top line in the selected range is used 4 ON Text Enter the text to display when the specified device is on Up to 24 single byte characters can be entered A space is also counted as one character 5 OFF Text Enter the text to display when the specified device is off Up to 24 single byte characters can be entered A space is also counted as one character 6 Special Character Enters a special character at the cursor position Select the character to e
78. bar graphs For details see Insert Bar Graph on page 14 8 e Text can be displayed and switched according to the value of a bit device input output internal relay shift register timer contact or counter contact For details see Insert Bit Device on page 14 6 Arbitrary text can be displayed e The specified text can be displayed For details see Edit MSG Message dialog box on page 14 3 The text display effects can be configured e Text can be scrolled blinked or inverted For details see Insert Text with Effect on page 14 7 Date time data can be displayed e The current date time and the date time when the MSG FB execution input turned on can be displayed on the LCD For details see 7 Special Data on page 14 4 The language for displayed text can be selected from 9 languages e Text be displayed in 9 languages using 4 types of character sets For details see MSG FB Common Settings on page 14 9 The text display settings can be configured e The scroll unit scroll speed and blinking speed can be configured For details see MSG FB Common Settings on page 14 9 Device values can be modified e Device values displayed with the MSG FB can be modified the SmartAXIS Pro LCD For details see Modifying Device Values on the SmartAXIS Pro on page 14 17 Note A maximum of 50 MSG FB can be entered in a user program Only one MSG FB message can be displayed on the LCD PRI for the MSG FB stores the MSG FB prior
79. frequency error is within 5 8 Reversible control enable This setting enables or disables reversible control and selects the reversible control method from the following reversible control modes Reversible control enable Mode 0 Disable Mode 1 Single pulse output Mode 2 Dual pulse output The details of reversible control mode are as follows Select this option when using Disabled pulse output in a single direction A Pulse A and pulse B can be used independently Reversible control Pulse A or B is used as pulse TIG output On off state of pulse C is AB edt used as reversible control Pulse A is used as forward pulse Reversible control A Duclasales TROU CW output Pulse B is used as p p reverse pulse CCW output The ports used on the SmartAXIS differ according to the combination of the RAMP FB pulse output port number the reversible control enable setting and the I O type of SmartAXIS Port used RAMP FB Reversible control enable 40 1 0 type 48 I 0 type Pulse outp
80. internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan To initialize the values only one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU Shot up FB or the SOTD Shot down FB 4 DE Deceleration Input DE specifies the deceleration signal Specify either an external input or an internal relay The external input can be specified as 10 to 1155 or the internal relay can be specified as MO to M1277 An interrupt is used to read the deceleration signal The deceleration signal is read without being affected by the user program scan High Speed IO I2 I3 I5 I6 I7 I1 14 110 to 115 Normal e prom The deceleration signal is read in the END processing This is affected by the user program scan 0 to M1277 Notes e Do not use the same input or internal relay as the deceleration signal in the ZRN1 and ZRN2 FBs If they operate simultaneously pulse output may not stop even if the deceleration signal turns from on to off e Touse the high speed proximity signal set the relevant input to Normal Input under Special Input on Function Area Settings Do not use the input as catch input high speed counter or frequency measurement e When using the high speed deceleration signal ensure that no chatter noise occurs in the deceleration signal 15 22 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 DEC 15 THE PULSE 5
81. must create a script in Script Manager beforehand For details about the scripts executed by the SCRPT FB refer to the following pages Script function overview e See Chapter 13 Scripts Script Function Overview in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e See Chapter 20 Scripts 1 1 Script Function Overview in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Script editing e See Chapter 13 Scripts Script Editing and Management the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e See Chapter 20 Scripts 2 Script Editing and Management in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned ascending order from zero The block number can Numbe B Block num to 999 41 d ck number be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used Input EN PXECUNON On off When the execution input is on the script that corresponds to the script ID is input executed Output OUT Output When the script execution is complete the output turns for 1 scan s1 Script ID 1 to 255 The ID of the script when execution input is on The value can be specified as a constant or a data register Parameters DO to 0998 D1 Execution D1000 to Specifies the data register whe
82. next step number is 0 pulse output ends after the current step is complete IDEC SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 29 15 THE PULSE Running step number This register stores the current step number Steady pulse frequency monitor This register stores the steady pulse frequency for the current step Frequency change time monitor This register stores the frequency change time for the current step Set the time in the range of 10 to 10 000 ms in 10 ms increments The first digit of the setting is discarded Preset value monitor This register stores the preset value for the current step Current value This register stores the number of pulses that have been output for the current step The current value is updated when the ARAMP FB is executed at each scan Error status If a configuration error occurs when each step starts running M8004 user program execution error is turned on and the error code is stored in this register Error code Status Content 0 Normal 3 Preset value designation error The preset value was not set between 1 to 100 000 000 4 Steady pulse frequency designation error The frequency was not set between 1 to 10 000 in operation mode 0 The frequency was not set between 20 to 10 000 in operation mode 1 5 Frequency change time designation error The frequency change time was not set between 10 and 10 000 7 Step options designation error The step options were
83. not set to a valid value 8 Next step number designation error The next step number was not set between 0 and 18 9 Interrupt number designation error The interrupt number was not set between 1 and 18 6 D2 Operation Status D2 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with the ARAMP1 and ARAMP2 FBs Starting from the specified internal relay 5 consecutive internal relays are used The range of available internal relay numbers is MO to M1270 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Address Content This relay remains on during pulse output Startin 0 Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when pulse output stops 9 Pulse output ON y tu pu tput stop number 0 1 Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are output and output completes This relay turns on when pulse output completes Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output not complete y P This relay turns on when the current step number changes to 0 number 1 complete 1 Pulse output complete This relay is off during pulse output Startin 0 Steady pulse output This relay is off when the pulse output state is steady 9 Pulse output state T P d E number 2 1 Changing output pulse frequency This relay is on when the pulse output is changing This relay turns on when the pulses output more than the configured preset value Starting Overflow 0 Overflow not occurred Puls
84. on The cause of the user program execution error can be checked using Online gt Monitor gt Monitor then Online gt Status gt Error Status gt Details For a list of user program execution errors see the following manuals e Chapter 14 Troubleshooting User Program Execution Error in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 2 Error Information in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual M8005 Remote I O Slave 1 Communication Error When an error occurs during communication with remote I O slave 1 M8005 turns on When the error is cleared M8005 turns off M8006 Remote I O Slave 2 Communication Error When an error occurs during communication with remote I O slave 2 M8006 turns on When the error is cleared M8006 turns off M8007 Remote I O Slave 3 Communication Error When an error occurs during communication with remote I O slave 3 M8007 turns on When the error is cleared M8007 turns off M8010 In Daylight Saving Time Period When the daylight saving time is enabled M8010 is turned on while in the daylight saving time period When the daylight saving tiem is disabled M8010 is always off M8013 Calendar Clock Data Write Adjust Error Flag When an error occurs while calendar clock data is written or clock data is adjusted M8013 turns on If calendar clock data is written or clock data is adjusted successfully M8013 turns off M8014 Calendar Clock Data Read Error Flag When an error occurs while calenda
85. overlapping block numbers used in any other function blocks cannot be used When the execution input turns on the date and time and the value s of Input EN Execution input ON OFF the specified device s are output to the CSV file in the specified folder When the execution input is off the DLOG FB does not operate The completion output turns on when the data writing process and the Output OUT Completion output execution of the DLOG FB are completed This turns on regardless of the success or failure of output to the SD memory card S1 Folder name String 1 The SD memory card folder name Parameters Di seine B Specify the data register to store the status code The status code is stored according to the DLOG FB execution status and result 1 Specify the SD memory card folder name as the desired text up to 8 single byte alphanumeric characters Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP cc B D AI Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X X 51 Folder name Di Execution status x 1 Specify the folder name by entering characters 2 Special data registers cannot be designated 16 2 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 ZIDEC 16 THE DATA LOGGING Settings DLOG Data Logging E377 DLOG Data Logging 9 Devices Settings Devices Settings 2 1 D1 Execution Status 51 Folder name Tag Name 4 5 6 7 Device Address Comment
86. preset value to zero Off delay Count Up Timer When the execution input turns on the output turns on After the TIMOU ouT execution input turns off the output turns off when the off delay TIMOU RST 100 ms 8 7 time elapses The current value is incremented from zero to the preset value Off delay Count Down Timer When the execution input turns on the output turns on After the TIMOD L our execution input turns off the output turns off when the off delay TIMOD RST 100 ms 8 9 time elapses The current value is decremented from the preset values to zero On off delay Timer our After the execution input turns on the output turns on when the TIMCU 100 ms on delay time elapses After the execution input turns off the 8 11 output turns off when the off delay time elapses Single Shot Pulse SPULS L our After the execution input turns on the output turns on for the E 8 14 RST 100 ms configured time period Dual Timer ERE EN 1 DTIM out The output is turned on and off according to the configured ON 8 16 100 and OFF time Random Pulse Output EN RPULS our The output is turned on for the length of random time within the RPULS 100 ms i 8 19 configured range of time Counter FB Output Refer to Inversion Symbol Name and Diagram Func
87. pulse counting 9 Description 1 to 1 000 in increments of 1 Hz 1 to 100 in increments of 1 PWM 1 and PWM 2 instructions only 1 to 100 000 000 1 to 100 000 000 Cancel 5 Output pulse frequency Set the frequency for the output pulse from 1 Hz to 1 000 Hz in 1 Hz increments The output frequency error is within 5 6 Pulse width ratio Specify the ON ratio duty cycle for the output pulse The duty cycle can be set for the output frequency in 1 increments The duty cycle can be set for the output frequency in 1 increments from 1 Hz to 50 Hz but from 51 Hz to 1 000 Hz the increments for the duty cycle that can be specified change depending on the output frequency The increment becomes pulse frequency 50 For example when 51 Hz is specified for the pulse frequency 51 50 2 rounded up so the increment is 2 When 1 000 Hz is specified for the pulse frequency 1000 50 20 so the increment is 20 For 2 increments a value from 1 to 2 set for Pulse width ratio is handled as 2 a value from 3 to 4 is handled as 4 For 20 increments a value from 1 to 20 is handled as 20 a value from 21 to 40 is handled as 40 7 Pulse counting Specify enabling or disabling pulse counting 0 Disable pulse counting Operation mode Supported PULS FB PULS1 PULS2 PULS3 PULS4 Pulses are continuously output while the execution input is on X X X X 1 Enable pulse counting 1
88. second cycle Notes e end the simulation function select Online gt Simulation gt Simulation again e You can monitor the state of the input connectors and output connectors of each FB When input connectors output connectors and connection lines are red they are on Blue indicates off e For details on the state of unconnected input connectors of each FB see the chapters for the FBs DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 11 1 OPERATION BASICS Download Program To download a user program to the SmartAXIS the communication method must be configured in advance The user program can be downloaded to the SmartAXIS using WindLDR over a USB connection or an Ethernet connection This section describes the procedure from configuring the communication method to downloading the user program using a USB connection as an example To use a USB connection the SmartAXIS USB port must be connected to a computer using a USB cable Windows computer A SmartAXIS Pro USB port Type USB cable HG9Z XCM42 USB maintenance cable q HD it aS Mini B plug A plug ooo 9600000000000 66066006 0000000000 0000000000 0000 9 USB port USB 2 0 Mini B connector Note communicate with the SmartAXIS a USB connectio
89. setting is disabled constant setting is selected When pulse output is enabled output is turned on for one scan at the instant 0 00 the date changes to the ON date When the execution input turns from off to on according to Pulse output Enabled Disabled the comparison of the current date with ON settings the P output is turned on for scan When pulse output is disabled the output turns or off according to the ON settings and OFF settings D0000 to 00996 clle of the data register area to store the dates for D1000 to D1996 l x Starting Starting from the specified data register 4 x N N number of S1 Depends on the 3 data registers parameter tabs consecutive data registers are allocated number of parameter aM i tabs 3 Specify only when indirect designation of the YEAR FB settings with data register is selected S2 Number of parameter tabs 1to 20 Specify the number of parameter tabs 1 BO to B199 can be used for the 12 I O type 2 D0000 to D0396 can be used for the 12 I O type 3 Arange that spans D0999 and D1000 cannot be set Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP B D AI Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X X Initialization input X X X S1 Starting data register xi 52 Number of parameter tabs X 1 Special data registers cannot be used SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 13 IDEC 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB Setti
90. settings is displayed in the dialog box 7 Click Allocate Comments 8 and you can set each name of the settings each content to the comments for the corresponding data registers This button is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the YEAR FB with data registers Data Register Allocation dialog box Data Register Allocation Description Year ON Month and Day ON Year OFF Month and Day OFF Year ON 7 Month and Day ON Year OFF Month and Day OFF Year ON Month and Day ON Month and Day OFF P4 Year ON uParameter tab This tab configures the settings for the output A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for 1 YEAR FB If indirectly specifying the settings for the YEAR FB with data registers the values configured on the parameter tabs are stored in the data registers when the initialization input is turned on This setting is shared in common with Configuring the dates as constant setting on page 13 14 See Parameter tab on page 13 15 m Preview The preview shows the ON OFF state for the output based on the settings configured on the parameter tabs in a calendar This function is shared in common with Configuring the dates as constant setting on page 13 14 See Preview on page 13 16 13 18 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB Data Register Allocation If indirectly specifying the
91. than the OFF threshold the ON threshold the output is turned off the output is turned off When the current value is equal to or greater than the ON threshold the output is turned on 4 Jh Initial value CP1 Relationship between the clock input and the preset input The preset input has a higher precedence than the clock input The clock input is enabled when one scan has elapsed after the preset input changes from on to off ON Reset input RST OFF l M Up clock input UP 1 i OFF Notes t1 N Enabled Nopisabled enabled Requires 1 scan or more e CO to C197 can be used as the counter number when the data type is specified as W word CO to C97 can be used for the 12 1 type Since 6 counters C are used when the data type is specified as D double word to C194 can be used CO to C94 can be used for the 12 I O type e The counters used by the up down selection reversible counter are allocated to the initial value ON threshold and OFF threshold in order starting from the specified counter number as shown below W word Counter Content Configurable range Start counter 0 Initial value Start counter C 1 ON threshold 0 to 65 535 Start counter 2 OFF threshold D double word Counter Content Configurable range Start counter 0 Initial value Start counter C 1 Start nter C 2 art ue ON threshold 0 to 4 294 967 295 Start counter C
92. the ON and OFF settings is not within the ON and OFF settings February 15 to February 17 2012 Therefore the output remains off February 2012 Current date n 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th M ON ad Execution input M0000 OFF Output port Q000 OFF T Judge ON setting OFF setting When the execution input is turned on or off during the period between the ON and OFF settings On February 15 2012 when the execution input is turned on the result of the current date compared with the ON and OFF settings is within the ON and OFF settings February 15 to February 17 2012 Therefore the output turns on When the execution input is turned off the output turns off On February 16 2012 when the execution input is turned on again according to the result of the current date compared with the ON and OFF settings the output turns on P February 2012 Current date 13th 14th 15th 16th 17th ON j T Execution input M0000 OFF f Output port Q000 1 OFF nes t 4 ON setting Judge Judge OFF setting When pulse output is enabled When the execution input is on at 0 00 on the date of the ON settings the output is turned on for one scan When the execution input turns on according to the comparison of the current date with ON settings the output is turned on for one scan Setting details P 1 tab ON settings July 02 2012 P 2 tab ON settin
93. the device address they are also displayed 3 Input connector Connectors for inputting the output states of other FBs to the FB Connect the output connectors of the other FBs to these input connectors The type of output connector bit analog can be connected varies depending on the input connectors of each FB Depending on each input connector FBs may be used with the input connectors unconnected For details see the descriptions of each FB Input connectors receiving a bit state can be configured as Inverted so that the inverted bit state can be input to the FB 4 Output connector FB devices This list shows the devices that can be used in FBD programs The connector for outputting the result of the FB operation FBs have only a single bit output on off or an analog output The result of the FB operation can be input to another FB by connecting the output connector to an input connector of the FB If the output connector is bit output the result of the FB operation can be inverted and output For the list of FBs that support output inversion see FB List on page 4 1 Output connectors of FBs other than the output FBs digital output internal relay must be connected to the input connectors of other FBs Symbol Name Attributes m FBD Description programs Devices for incorporating on off information from external devices to the I Digital Input R SmartAXIS The state can be changed by changing
94. the state of the external input or by the forced I O function Devices for outputting on off information from the SmartAXIS to external devices The Q Digital Output RW state can be changed with the forced I O function the program or the SCRPT FB Devices for receiving FB output internally To incorporate the output results of a FB as M Internal Relay R W looped back input insert an internal relay in between the output connector and the input connector of the FB The state can be changed with a FBD program or the SCRPT FB M Special Internal R Devices for referring to special internal relays The state can be changed with the Relay SCRPT FB Bit devices used with the SFR FB The state be changed with the SFR FB and R Shift Register R the SCRPT FB Al Analog Input Devices for incorporating analog input signals from external devices the SmartAXIS Timer Timers used internally in the SmartAXIS These are used with the timer FBs Counter Counters used internally in the SmartAXIS These are used with the counter FBs 2 Word devices used for storing numeric data The value can be changed with the D Data Register SCRPT FB B Block Relay R Devices that indicate the output state of FBs other than timers and counters 1 Using WindLDR inputs and outputs can be forcibly turned on and off For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Forced Function in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual ZIDEC
95. to 240 1 Data 109 DLOG 24 to 276 1 Data Logging x Data 24 to 276 1 Script Script SCRPT 12 1 High speed Counter HSC 12 1 Special RS Flip flop RSFF 8 1 1 The size of the WEEK YEAR FB varies depending on the number of tabs 2 The size of the MSG FB varies depending on the parameters used The minimum size is 12 bytes 3 The size of the ARAMP FB varies depending on the number of steps configured 4 The size of the DLOG TRACE FB varies depending on the logging parameters FBD Program Examples Example program 1 In operation Output _ E 0001 M8125 For example the above FBD program the program size the number of used devices be calculated as described below Block FB Size Qty of Bytes Number of Used devices number Block B Timer T Counter C M8125 SM Special Internal Relay Special internal relays inputs and outputs do not affect the FBD program Ii I Input size or the number of used devices 00 0 Output B1 WEEK Weekly Timer 24 Number of tabs 2 1 0 0 TO DTIM Timer 12 0 3 0 B2 OR Logical OR 12 1 0 0 Total 48 Program size 2 3 0 4 4 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 APPENDIX Example program 2 7100010 A rooo3 7 10004 C010 7 10002 Tn operation Output M8125 For example in the above FBD program the program size an
96. turned off When the execution input is off the output is turned off W word OP1 Data type I integer Defines the range of the values handled with comparison values 1 and 2 D double The default is I integer Parameters L long OP2 Operator lt gt lt gt The comparison operator Select one comparison operator from the six lt gt available 1 to B199 for the 12 I O type 2 When the data type is W word the value be specified within the range of 0 to 65 535 When the data type is I integer the value can be specified within the range of 32 768 to 32 767 When the data type is D double word the value can be specified within the range of 0 to 4 294 967 295 When the data type is L long the value can be specified within the range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 3 For a constant specify the value within the valid range of the data type To indirectly specify the value with a device specify it with the device number where the value is stored and specify the content of the device within the valid range of the specified data type 4 The relationship between the operators and the output is shown in the table on page 11 2 IDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 11 1 11 THE COMPARISON Operator The output is turned on When comparison value 1 comparison value 2 The output is turned off When comparison value 1 comparison value 2 lt gt
97. value Details Steady pulse frequency 0008 20 200 Hz Frequency change time D0009 3000 3 000 msec Preset value D0010 D0011 5000 Preset value 5 000 Control direction D0012 Forward Forward 0 Acceleration deceleration control D0012 Acceleration deceleration later Acceleration deceleration later 2 Next step number D0013 3 Step 3 15 40 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 THE PULSE Step 3 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table EN Devices Settings Ramp Table E E _ E Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step 2 Steady pulse frequency D0014 100 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0015 3000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value D0016 D0017 5000 1 to 100 000 000 ad Control direction D0018 Reverse Acceleration deceleration contral 00018 Acceleration deceleration first Next step number 00019 4 0104 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D0014 100 1kHz Frequency change time D0015 3000 3 000 msec Preset value D0016 D0017 5000 Preset value 5 000 Control direction D0018 Reverse Reverse 1 Acceleration deceleration control D0018 Acceleration deceleration first Acceleration deceleration first 0 Next step number D0019 4 Step 4 Step 4 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table ex
98. when Monthly is selected Day Day of the week or Specify ON duration settings are valid every month Month setting is disabled 3 ON settings This section configures the date to turn on the output The output is turned on at 0 00 on the configured date Settings Content Range 2000 t Year Specifies the year to turn on the output 5 2099 Month Specifies the month to turn on the output 1to 12 Day Specifies the day to turn on the output 1to31 Month and Day z Specifies the day as day of the week to turn on the output Select in the range of 1to6 Settings Day of the week the 1st week to the 5th week or the last week and set the day of the week 006 End of month Specify the end of month to turn on the output on the last day of the month 4 OFF settings This section configures the date to turn off the output The output is turned off at 0 00 on the configured date Settings Content Range 2000 t Year Specifies the year to turn off the output 08 2099 Month Specifies the month to turn off the output 1 to 12 Day Specifies the day to turn off the output 1 to 31 Month and Day Specifies the day as day of week to turn off the output Select the range of 1 to 6 Settings Day of the week the 1st week to the 5th week or the last week and set the day of the week 0 106 End of month Specify the end of month to turn off the output on the last day of the month Spec
99. with the ON and OFF thresholds and the output is turned on or off according to the comparison result Symbol PRST CUD OUT CLK U D Operation description When the preset input PRST is on the initial value is stored to the current value and the output OUT is turned off When the preset input is off the counter is in the countable state While the counter is in the countable state the CUD FB increments or decrements the current value at every rising edge in the clock input CLK When the up down selection input U D is on the counter is decremented by 1 When the up down selection input U D is off the counter is incremented by 1 The current value is compared with the ON and OFF thresholds and the result is output Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each counter FB The counter number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The counter number can be changed to a desired number However the counter numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used The preset input is executed with a higher precedence than the clock input When the preset input is on the initial value is stored to the current value PRST Preset input On off and the output is turned off When the preset input is off the counter FB is in the countable state When unconnected the preset input is handled as off Input
100. 0 through D0005 to the CSV files 5 Configure D0010 to output the value of D0010 to the CSV files with the data type F float TRACE Data Tracing Ea Devices Settings 2 Q Tag Name Device Address Display Type Repeat 00000 DEC e 2 4 5 00010 Dec DE s Tracing datasize 990 bytes MAX 1024bytes Remaining size 34 bytes Thenumber of scans 17 Scan Cancel The configuration is now completed Operation Description When M0000 is turned on the TRACE FB is executed one time When the TRACE FB is executed the data of 00000 through D0005 and D0010 in the previous 17 scans are output to a CSV file on the SD memory card as decimal values along with the date and time of the execution The saved location of CSV files is DATAO001YTRACEWMRESULT The oldest data is saved at the top of the trace data and the latest data is saved at the bottom of the trace data When the execution of the TRACE FB completes the completion output of the TRACE FB is turned on and the CMP FB is executed once CMP FB compares the status code stored in the execution status D0100 with 0 and turns 00 on or off 00 is turned on when an error occurs in the TRACE FB Output results Triggered at 2012 02 06 10 20 30 Scan D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010 Old 12
101. 00 in increments of 1 ms Step 3 14 Preset value 1 5 100000000 1 to 100 000 000 Step 4 ontrol direction Step 5 leration deceleration contral 1 6 Acceleration deceleration first Next step number 17 1 Oto 18 step Step 7 Step 8 Step 9 v 12 Step numbers Selects the step number to configure 13 Steady pulse frequency This setting specifies the frequency at the steady output state before or after changing the frequency For mode 0 set this value in the range of 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments For mode 1 set this value in the range of 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments 14 Frequency change time This setting specifies the time to increase and to decrease the pulse frequency Set this value in the range of 10 to 10 000 10 ms increments The first digit of the setting is ignored 15 Preset value This setting configures the number of output pulses in the range of 1 to 100 000 000 16 Step options This setting configures the control direction for the step and the execution timing of the change in the step bit bit bit 15 14 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Timing of change Step direction 0 Before 0 Forward 1 After 1 Reverse The frequency changes as shown in the following diagram according to the setting for the execution timing of the change For Before the pulse frequency changes at a constant rate until it reaches the st
102. 00 ms TU Time unit Specify the time unit for the timer 10 ms 1 ms 1 TO to T99 for the 12 I O type 2 The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP cc B D AI Constant TRG Execution input X X X X X X X Preset value X X 8 5 d DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 THE TIMER Timing Chart Execution input ON ed 41 Output ON QUT OFF the execution input is on for a shorter time than the on delay time Change in current value Preset value When the execution input TRG is off the current value returns to the preset value TP and the output OUT is off When the execution input turns on counting starts While the execution input is on the current value is decremented and when it reaches 0 the counting stops and the output turns on The output keeps on until the execution input turns off Notes TO to T199 be used for the timer number However for the 12 1 type TO to T99 can be used e The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the p
103. 0032 20 200 Hz Frequency change time D0033 5000 5 000 msec Preset value D0034 D0035 2000 Preset value 2 000 Control direction D0036 Acceleration deceleration control D0036 Acceleration deceleration first Acceleration deceleration first 0 Next step number D0037 5 Step 0 end DEC SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 45 15 THE PULSE 15 46 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 16 THE DATA LOGGING The data logging function block saves log data for specified devices to the SD memory card DLOG Data Log The DLOG FB saves the values of the specified devices in the specified data format as a CSV file to the SD memory card Symbol EN DLOG OUT Operation When the execution input EN turns on the date and time and the value s of the specified device s are output to the CSV file in the specified folder When the execution is finished the completion output OUT is turned on and the execution status is stored in the specified device When the specified folder does not exist on the SD memory card that folder is created The folder path is DATAO001 DATALOG User specified folder For details on the folder structure see Chapter 5 Special Functions SD Memory Card in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual The CSV file name is DATE csv The date when the DLOG FB is turned on is used as DATE Example If the date is September 30 2011 the file name is 20110930 csv When
104. 12 I O type Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP cc B D AI Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X X PRI Priority X 14 2 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 14 THE INTERFACE FB Settings For the MSG FB settings there are settings for the individual MSG FB and settings that are common to all the MSG FBs Note Settings that are common to all the MSG FBs are modified in the Function Area Settings dialog box of WindLDR For details see MSG FB Common Settings on page 14 9 MSG FB Individual Settings The settings for the individual MSG FB such as texts and devices to display and the priority can be configured in the Edit MSG FB dialog box Edit MSG Message dialog box MSG Message E3777 Options 10 B 1 1 Priority 0 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings 7 8 9 SpecialData Special Character Insert Word Device eee 3 7 1 4 5 Bar Graph 1 6 1 LCD Display The screen displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD when the MSG FB is executed can be configured in this area Enter characters at the cursor position using the keyboard The character input method insert overwrite is changed by clicking Insert 9 Note Text entered on the LCD Screen 1 with the keyboard cannot be set to scroll blink or invert To scroll blink or invert the text enter the text with Text with Effect 5
105. 13 September 2013 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Configure the tabs as shown above and connect the YEAR FB output to 0000 13 24 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 s 8 12 8 15 8 12 8 15 8 12 8 15 8 12 8 15 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB To turn on output 0000 only on the 2nd Monday of each month from 2000 to 2099 January February March April ON date 2000 2nd Monday piace cae te of each month OFF OFF date 2099 2nd Monday X X La oy of each month one day 2nd 2nd 2nd 2nd Yearly setting ON Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday Monday of each of each of each of each of each of each of each of each Monthly setting ON month month month month month month month month one day one day one day one day Parameter tab YEAR Yearly Timer 9 Devices P1 ON settings El Monthy Year 2000 Month and Day Settings Month T 18 Day of the week End of month OFF settings Year 2009 E 0 2 V Specify ON duration SS Year 2013 meom Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa oss m m 6 7 8 9H HQ 3 456789 324 567 89 13 14 15 16 07 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 17 18 19 20 21
106. 15 8 7 1 08031 0 MA of SD memory card Memory cartridge 0 No optional cartridge is installed 1 Memory cartridge is installed 2 SD memory card is installed 3 Memory cartridge and SD memory card are installed D8039 SD Memory Card Capacity The capacity of the inserted SD or SDHC maximum size 32 GB memory card in megabytes is stored to D8039 D8040 D8047 Analog Input Value The analog input values 0 to 10 VDC to the analog input terminals are converted to digital values 0 to 1000 and stored to the corresponding special data registers Linear conversions can be configured for the analog input AI FBs Even when the linear conversions are configured for AI FBs the special data registers store the analog values 0 to 1000 before the linear conversions are applied 8040 10 D8041 AI1 D8042 AI2 08043 D8044 AI4 D8045 AI5 D8046 AI6 D8047 AI7 D8050 D8073 D8134 D8145 High speed Counter and Frequency Measurement These special data registers are used with the high speed counter function and the frequency measurement function For details on the high speed counter see the following manuals e Chapter 5 Special Functions High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e Chapter 3 Project 4 Special Functions 4 7 High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y
107. 2013 06 25 Yearly setting OFF Monthly setting OFF YEAR Yearly Timer Lo YEAR Yearly Timer E377 Devices p Devices 1 1 ON settings Eyeariy E Monthy Data register settings Data register settings ver mu B 51 FirstDR INI Initialization Input Month and Day Settings Tag Name 09000 M0000 ss September ES Month September ow iE Device Address 100000 M0000 D0000 D0003 D End of month Comment OFF settings Year 2013 Month and Day Settings Month Dune E 5 Day of the week End of month C Specify ON duration E Pulse output S2 The number of parameter tabs 1 E i Preview Preview ven 2a Year 536 Su Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa EE a 24 5528 aaa m ESI EH et EE EE a Eon a7 18 19 20 217 22 BEEE 25 26 27 2 2 30 Causes Data Register Allocation The settings on the P 1 tab are allocated to data registers 00000 to 00003 as shown the table below The settings configured on the P 1 tab are stored 00000 to D0003 when the initialization input INI is turned on Data register Settings Initial setting D0000 Year 2011 ON settings D0001 P 1 tab Month Da
108. 3 D8158 Analog Input 120 Every scan 3 13 D8159 Analog Input 121 Every scan 3 13 D8160 Analog Input 122 Every scan 3 13 Remote 1 0 D8161 Slave 2 Analog Input AI23 Every scan 3 13 D8162 Analog Input AI24 Every scan 3 13 D8163 Analog Input AI25 Every scan 3 13 D8164 Analog Input AI26 Every scan 3 13 D8165 Analog Input AI27 Every scan 3 13 D8166 Communication Error Status When error occurred 3 13 D8167 Analog Input AI30 Every scan 3 13 D8168 Analog Input AI31 Every scan 3 13 D8169 Analog Input AI32 Every scan 3 13 2 Remote 1 0 D8170 Slave 3 Analog Input AI33 Every scan 3 13 D8171 Analog Input AI34 Every scan 3 13 D8172 Analog Input AI35 Every scan 3 13 D8173 Analog Input AI36 Every scan 3 13 D8174 Analog Input AI37 Every scan 3 13 D8175 D8183 Reserved 08184 Data Register Start Address to Read 3 13 08185 ROM Backup Number of Registers to Read 3 13 D8186 D8199 Reserved D8000 Quantity of Inputs The total of input points provided on the SmartAXIS is stored to D8000 D8001 Quantity of Outputs The total of output points provided on the SmartAXIS is stored to D8001 r IDEC SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 3 9 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES D8002 SmartAXIS Type Information Information about the SmartAXIS type is stored to D8002 0 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 12 I O type 1 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 24 I O type 2 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 40 I O type 3 S
109. 345 2 12345 56789 1 56789 3 402823 38 12345 2 12347 56789 1 56788 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12349 56789 1 56787 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12351 56789 1 56786 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12353 56789 1 56785 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12355 56789 1 56784 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12357 56789 1 56783 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12359 56789 1 56782 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12361 56789 1 56781 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12363 56789 1 56780 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12365 56789 1 56779 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12367 56789 1 56778 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12369 56789 1 56777 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12371 56789 1 56776 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12373 56789 1 56775 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12375 56789 1 56774 3 402823E 38 New 12345 2 12377 56789 1 56773 3 402823E 38 16 14 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DEC 17 THE SCRIPT The script enables you to program complicated processing with conditional branching logical operations arithmetic operations and functions in the scripting language Created scripts are executed by specifying their ID in script FBs SCRPT Script Executes the script with the specified ID Symbol EN SCRPT OUT Operation When the execution input EN is on the script that corresponds to the script ID specified by S1 is executed When script execution is complete the execution status and the execution time are stored in the specified data registers and the output OUT turns on for 1 scan To use the SCRPT FB you
110. 5 8 The number of pulses specified by the preset value are output X X SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 I DE 15 THE PULSE 8 Preset value For Enable pulse counting specify the number of pulses to output 9 Current value The number of pulses that were output is stored in this data register The current value is updated when the PWM FB is executed at each scan 10 Error status If a configuration error occurs when the PWM FB execution input turns from off to on M8004 user program execution error is turned on and the error code is stored in this register Error code Content Details 0 Normal 1 Pulse frequency designation error The pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 1 000 2 Pulse width ratio designation error The pulse width ratio was not set between 1 and 100 4 Preset value designation error The preset value was not set between 1 and 100 000 000 Operation example PWM 1 FB pulse counting enabled timing chart For PWM1 FB the external input 10 is connected to EN the internal relay MO is connected to INI D201 is specified to S1 the internal relay M50 is specified to D1 1000 PWM1 0000 0000 When the execution When the current value While the execution input is off When the execution input turns off input turns on the reaches the preset value n1 Pulse width ratio is changed to w2 pulse output stops before the current pulse output s
111. 8 13 8 THE TIMER SPULS Single Shot Pulse When the execution input turns on the output turns on according to the operation mode Symbol TRG SPULS RST 1 sec TRG SPULS RST 10 ms Operation OUT OUT TRG SPULS OUT RST 100 ms TRG SPULS OUT RST 1 ms When the execution input TRG turns on while the reset input RST is off the output turns and the current value starts being incremented When the current value reaches the preset value the output turns off Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify the Timer function block Number Timer number TO to T199 The timer number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The timer number can be changed to a desired number However the timer numbers already used in any other Timer FBs cannot be used TRG Execution On off When the execution input turns on the current value returns to 0 and the input current value starts being incremented Input The reset input has priority over the execution input When the reset input is RST Reset input On off on the output is off regardless of the on off state of the execution input When unconnected the reset input is handled as off When the execution input is on the output is on for the length of time Output OUT Output specified by the preset value When the execution input turns off while
112. 8026 turns on When an SD memory card is not inserted M8026 turns off M8027 SD Memory Card Writing Flag While logging data is written to the SD memory card M8027 turns on When writing logging data is finished M8027 turns off M8030 M8061 Special Internal Relays for High speed Counter Special internal relays used for the high speed counter For details on the high speed counter see the following manuals e Chapter 5 Special Functions High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e Chapter 3 4 7 High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual M8076 SD Memory Card Access Stop Flag Access to the SD memory card stops when M8076 is turned from off to on M8090 M8095 Catch Input ON OFF Status When a rising or falling input edge is detected during a scan the input statuses of catch inputs Group 1 10 through Group 6 17 at the moment are set to M8090 through M8095 respectively without regard to the scan status Only one edge is detected in one scan For the catch input function see Chapter 5 Special Functions Catch Input in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual M8110 M8112 Connection Status When SmartAXIS and a network device are connected via the maintenance communication server user communication server client or Modbus TCP server client the connection status turns on When no network devices are connected the connection status turns off These relays are always off for the 12 I O type SmartAXIS witho
113. 9 20 21 22 23 17 18 19 20 21 22 28 24 25 26 27 28 29 3 52 The number of parameter tabs 1 E 4 3 A BAS QU 3 emen 1 Data register settings Select constant setting or indirect designation with data registers for the YEAR FB date configuration To configure the dates by specifying data registers select this check box z Selected check box The date settings are indirectly specified by data registers Configure the dates by using data registers The dates can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For allocating the data register area see Data Register Allocation on page 13 19 The data registers can be initialized with the dates configured on the parameter tabs by turning on the initialization input For initialization see 3 INI Initialization Input Note When this check box is cleared the dates are constant settings The dates are configured on the parameter tabs In this case the dates cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For constant settings see Configuring the dates as constant setting on page 13 14 2 S1 First Data Register Specify the start of the data register area to store the special dates for the YEAR FB This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the dates with data registers Settings Content Tag Name Specify the tag name or the device address for the device Device Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the
114. B Operation example ZRN1 FB timing chart For ZRN1 FB the external input IO is connected to EN the internal relay MO is connected to INI the external input I2 is connected to DE D200 is specified to S1 the internal relay M10 is specified to D1 15 24 Output pulse Q15 ZRN1 FB execution input 1000 Deceleration signal 1002 1000 ZRN1 0000 0000 1002 Initial speed Creep speed Pulse output ON 0010 Pulse output complete 1 0011 0000 When the ZRN1 FB execution input turns from off to on pulse output starts at the initial pulse frequency When pulse output starts M10 turns on M11 turns off and QO turns off When the deceleration signal 12 turns from off to on pulse output frequency changes to the creep pulse frequency When the deceleration signal 12 turns from on to off pulse output stops When pulse output stops M10 turns off M11 turns on and QO turns on If the ZRN1 FB execution input 10 turns off during pulse output pulse output stops immediately If the execution input 10 turns on again operation starts from the beginning Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected in pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the ZRN1 FB execution input turns from off to on The state of the initialization input MO are not reflected while the ZRN1 FB execution input is on If you wish to initialize the data regis
115. B of the SmartAXIS series I Digital Input A function block to use the state on off of a digital input Symbol OUT Operation The digital input FB outputs the on off state of the digital input Specify a digital input number to the FB Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify the digital input function block Number I Input number 10 to 1155 1 Specify a digital input number However the digital input numbers already used in any other digital input FBs cannot be used Input Output OUT Output Outputs the on off state of the specified digital input Parameters 1 The range for the digital input varies depending the SmartAXIS type Product series Digital input I 12 type IO to I7 8 inputs 24 type IO to 117 16 inputs 140 to I75 30 inputs I80 to 1115 30 inputs 1120 to 1155 30 inputs 40 I O type IO to 127 24 inputs 140 to I75 30 inputs I80 to 1115 30 inputs 1120 to 1155 30 inputs 48 type 10 to 135 30 inputs 140 to I75 30 inputs I80 to 1115 30 inputs 1120 to 1155 30 inputs Touch IO to I7 8 inputs IDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 5 1 5 THE INPUT SM Special Internal Relay A function block to use the state on off of a special internal relay Symbol Operation SM OUT
116. B1386 3 11 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES D8074 Backlight ON Time The backlight ON time is stored The backlight ON time can be configured by changing the value in D8074 between 1 to 65 535 seconds When D8074 is 0 the backlight is always ON The backlight ON time can also be changed with the HMI function For details on the HMI function see Chapter 6 HMI Function Changing Backlight ON Time in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual D8077 Out of Analog Input Range Status When an analog input value is 11V or higher the corresponding 08077 bit turns on When an analog input value is lower than 11V the corresponding D8077 bit turns off The assignment of each analog input is as follows Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 8 7 D8077 6 ELA J Analog Input 0 Analog Input 1 Analog Input 2 0 eu Analog Input 3 Analog Input 4 Analog Input 5 Analog Input 6 Analog Input 7 D8078 D8083 MAC Address Read only MAC address of the SmartAXIS is stored to the special data registers in hexadecimal as shown below Example MAC address AA BB CC DD EE FF D8078 AAh D8079 BBh D8080 CCh D8081 DDh D8082 EEh D8083 FFh D8084 D8087 IP Address Current Data Read only IP address of the SmartAXIS is stored to the special data registers as shown below Example IP address aaa bbb ccc ddd D8084 aaa D8085 bbb D8086 ccc D8087 ddd D8088 D8091 Subnet Mask C
117. CC CP B D Constant EN Exctinipt X X X X X Xx x S1 Folder name Di Execution status x 1 Specify the folder name by entering characters 2 Special data registers cannot be designated DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 16 9 16 THE DATA LOGGING Settings TRACE Data Tracing E377 TRACE Data Tracing 9 Devices Settings Devices Settings 2 1 D1 Execution Status S1 Folder name Tag Name 5 6 7 Tag name Device address Display fype Repeat Device Address a DRO DEC Comment 8 tracing datasize 0 bytes MAX 1024bytes 9 Remaining size 1024 bytes 10 thenumber of scans 0 Scan Cancel Cancel 1 S1 Folder name Specify the folder name on the SD memory card that will store the trace data with a desired text up to 8 single byte alphanumeric characters Notes e The following single byte characters cannot be used in folder names lt gt e Consecutive periods cannot be used in folder names e A period cannot be used at the start or the end of the folder name e Single byte spaces at the start or the end of the folder name are omitted 2 D1 Execution Status Specifies the data register to store the status code One of the following status codes is stored according to the TRACE FB execution status and result
118. Cleared Read M8177 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 3 3 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES M8000 Start Control M8000 is used to control the operation of the CPU The CPU stops operation when M8000 is turned off while the CPU is running M8000 can be turned on or off using the WindLDR Online menu When a stop or reset input is designated M8000 must remain on to control the CPU operation using the stop or reset input M8000 maintains its status when the CPU is powered down When the data to be maintained during power failure is broken after the CPU has been off for a period longer than the battery backup duration the CPU restarts operation or not as selected in Configuration gt Run Stop Control gt Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error For details see the following manuals e Chapter 5 Special Functions Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e Chapter 3 Project 4 Special Functions 4 4 Run Stop Selection at Memory Backup Error in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 8001 1 Clock Reset While M8001 is on M8121 1 sec clock is turned off 8002 All Outputs OFF When M8002 is turned on all outputs and remote outputs go off until M8002 is turned off Self maintained circuits using outputs also go off and are not restored when M8002 is turned off 8004 User Program Execution Error When an error occurs while executing a user program M8004 turns
119. Clock input ON OFF U D Up down selection input ON OFF DI Data input ON OFF DIR Control direction input ON OFF INI Initialization input ON OFF DE Deceleration signal input ON OFF INT Interrupt input ON OFF DAT DATA Comparison value Analog UL Upper limit Analog LL Lower limit Analog ON ON threshold Analog OFF OFF threshold Analog Output connector Symbol Description Input format OUT Output ON OFF AOUT Analog output Analog Parameter Symbol Description MIN Linear conversion minimum MAX Linear conversion maximum S1 52 Control register folder name script ID number of parameter tabs Di D2 Operation status monitor register execution status execution result TP Timer FB preset value TU Time unit CP Counter FB preset value OP Operation mode data type high speed counter group R Start shift register N n Number of constituent bits pulse output port number PRI Priority IDEC SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 4 13 4 FB REFERENCE FB connection lines The lines that connect FB input connectors and output connectors are called connection lines FB input connectors can be connected to the output connectors of other FBs but more than one output connectors cannot be connected to a single input connector In this situation use a logical operation FB as shown in the following example The FB output connector can be connected to more than one input connectors of the other FBs There is no limit to the number of input connecto
120. DLOG 16 1 DTIM 8 16 H HOUR 9 7 HSC 18 1 I I 5 1 M 6 2 MSG 14 1 N NAND 7 2 NOR 7 4 NOT 77 OR 7 3 P PULS 15 1 PWM 15 6 Q Q 61 R R 5 3 RAMP 15 11 RCMP 11 5 RPULS 8 19 RSFF 18 3 5 SCRPT 12 1 SFR 10 1 SM 5 2 SOTD 7 9 SOTU 7 8 SPULS 8 14 STIG 11 3 T TIMCU 8 11 TIMD 8 5 TIMOD 8 9 TIMOU 8 7 TIMU 8 1 TRACE 16 8 TRUTH 7 10 Ww WEEK 13 1 X XNOR 7 6 XOR 2 5 YEAR 13 12 ZRN 15 21 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386
121. Date when input of MSG instruction is tumed on Time when input of MSG instruction is tumed on 19 After the settings are configured click OK The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area c c 7 ew Options Priority 0 E Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display YYYY MM DD Work Area This concludes configuring the settings LCD display When 0000 is on the room temperature stored 00002 is displayed as the numeric value C and bar graph When 0000 is off the outdoor temperature stored in 00002 is displayed as the numeric value C and bar graph 14 16 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDEC room temp is Now 28 C IDEC outdoor temp is 14 THE INTERFACE FB Modifying Device Values on the SmartAXIS Pro The values of the word devices displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD can be modified using the SmartAXIS Pro operation buttons The values cannot be modified when the SmartAXIS Pro is stopped To modify the value of word device While the above message is displayed press and hold the OK button and the cursor is displayed on the devices t
122. Default Cancel DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 16 5 16 THE DATA LOGGING Examples DLOG FB When is turned on the decimal values of 00000 through D0005 data type W word 00010 data type floating point are saved in a CSV file in the RESULT folder on the SD memory card every 10 seconds Output example Time D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010 2012 02 06 10 20 30 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823E 38 2012 02 06 10 20 40 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823E 38 2012 02 06 10 20 50 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823 38 sample user program operates as follows B001 is turned on when the transfer of log data to the SD memory card is complete The DLOG FB status code is stored D100 The status code saved D100 is checked and 00 is turned on if an error occurs e Configuration Procedure 1 Insert each function block in the function block editor 2 Configure the DLOG FB Configure the Devices tab 1 Designate D0100 as D1 Execution Status DLOG Data Logging 5 me Devices Settings D1 Execution Status Tag Name 0100 Device Address Comment Cancel 16 6 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DEC Configure the Settings tab 2 Enter RESULT in S1 Folder Name 3 Configure D0000 to output the decimal valu
123. Device Enter the device to display as a bar graph Valid Devices I integer D D double word CC CP D L long D F float D 2 Data Type Selects the data type for the specified device Data Type W word X I integer X D double word X L long X F float For data types see Data types on page 4 10 3 Maximum Enter the maximum value for the bar graph If the device value is larger than the maximum value the bar graph is displayed as the maximum value The valid range varies based on the data type See Data types on page 4 10 4 Minimum Enter the minimum value for the bar graph If the device value is smaller than the minimum value the bar graph is displayed as the minimum value The valid range varies based on the data type See Data types on page 4 10 5 Origin Enter the value to be the origin of the bar graph If the device value is larger than the origin value the bar graph is displayed on the right side of the origin value If the device value is smaller than the origin value the bar graph is displayed on the left side of the origin value The valid range varies based on the data type See Data types on page 4 10 The origin value must satisfy the condition of Minimum x Origin Maximum Min lt Origin lt mm 6 Occupied Area The occupied area is determined by the selected range on the LCD screen area or work area If multiple lines
124. E _ E Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step 2 Steady pulse frequency D0026 20 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0027 8000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms mui Preset value D0028 D0029 100000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction D0030 Bes 7 lAcceleration deceleration contral D0030 Acceleration deceleration later Step 6 Want een 00031 0 0o 6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D0026 20 200 Hz Frequency change time D0027 8000 8 000 msec Preset value D0028 D0029 100000 Preset value 100 000 Control direction D0030 Acceleration deceleration control D0030 Acceleration deceleration later Acceleration deceleration later 2 Next step number D0031 0 0 output Step 6 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table EN Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step 2 Steady pulse frequency D0032 20 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0033 5000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value 00034 00035 2000 1 to 100 000 000 idi Control direction D0036 T Acceleration deceleration contral D0036 Acceleration decelertion first Bev step number D0037 0 0 to 6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D
125. ESSES Note Do not change the data in any of the reserved special data registers otherwise the SmartAXIS may not operate correctly Special Data Register Device Addresses Device Address Description Updated See Page D8000 Quantity of Inputs When I O initialized 3 9 D8001 Quantity of Outputs When I O initialized 3 9 D8002 SmartAXIS Type Information Power up 3 10 D8003 Memory Cartridge Information Power up 3 10 D8004 Reserved D8005 General Error Code When error occurred 3 10 D8006 User Program Execution Error Code When error occurred 3 10 D8007 Reserved D8008 Year Every 500 ms 3 10 D8009 Month Every 500 ms 3 10 D8010 Calendar Clock Day Every 500 ms 3 10 D8011 Current Data Day of Week Every 500 ms 3 10 D8012 Read only Hour Every 500 ms 3 10 D8013 Minute Every 500 ms 3 10 D8014 Second Every 500 ms 3 10 D8015 Year 3 10 D8016 Month 3 10 D8017 Calendar Clock Day 30 08018 New Data Day of Week 3 10 D8019 Write only Hour 3 10 D8020 Minute 3 10 D8021 Second 3 10 Constant Scan Time Preset Value D8022 1 to 1 000 ms B 310 D8023 Tine Scan Time Current Value ms Every scan 3 10 D8024 Scan Time Maximum Value ms At occurrence 3 10 D8025 Scan Time Minimum Value ms At occurrence 3 10 D8026 Communication Mode Information Port 2 and Port 3 Ev
126. Enable pulse counting specify the number of pulses to output Current value The number of pulses that were output is stored in this data register The current value is updated when the PULS FB is executed at each scan 10 Error status If a configuration error occurs when the PULS FB execution input turns from off to on M8004 user program execution error is turned on and the error code is stored in this register Error code Content Details 0 Normal PULS1 The pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 10 000 in operation mode 0 2 Pulse frequency designation PULS2 The pulse frequency was not set between 20 and 10 000 in operation mode 1 error PULS3 PULSA The pulse frequency was not set between 1 and 5 000 in operation mode 0 4 Preset value designation error The preset value was not set between 1 and 100 000 000 Operation example PULS1 FB pulse counting enabled timing chart 15 4 For PULS1 FB the external input IO is connected to EN the internal relay MO is connected to INI D200 is specified to S1 the internal relay 50 is specified to D1 1000 PULS1 0000 0000 When the execution When the current value While the execution input is off When the execution input turns off input turns on the reaches the preset value n1 Output pulse frequency is changed to pulse output stops before the current pulse output starts the pulse output stops 2 and Preset value is changed to n2
127. FT9Y B1386 2 1 SERIES smart AXIS FBD Programming Manual IDEC CORPORATION SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Read the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual and SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual to make sure of correct operation before starting installation wiring operation maintenance and inspection of the SmartAXIS e All SmartAXIS modules are manufactured under IDEC s rigorous quality control system but users must add a backup or failsafe provision to the control system when using the SmartAXIS in applications where heavy damage or personal injury may be caused in case the SmartAXIS should fail e In this user s manual safety precautions are categorized in order of importance to Warning and Caution e The SmartAXIS is not designed for use in medical equipment nuclear power railways aviation passenger vehicle equipment or similar applications requiring a high degree of reliability and safety The SmartAXIS cannot be used for such applications e When using the SmartAXIS in applications not described above that require a high degree of reliability in terms of functionality and precision appropriate measures such as failsafe mechanisms and redundant mechanisms must be taken for a system containing the SmartAXIS e Emergency stop and interlocking circuits must be configured outside the SmartAXIS e If relays or transistors in the SmartAXIS output circuits should fail outputs may remain in the on or off state For output signals whi
128. LDR and LCD and buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro Touch The changed preset values are stored in the RAM and the changes are not reflected to the user program saved in the ROM When the SmartAXIS is turned off the changed preset values are reset to the original values stored in the ROM e To store the changed preset values to the user program in ROM use one of the following methods Store the preset values to the user program in the ROM using WindLDR SmartAXIS Pro Lite only Select Online gt Monitor gt Start Monitor Select Online gt PLC gt Status to open the PLC Status dialog box and click the Confirm button under Timer counter preset value change state Once the changed preset values are confirmed the preset values cannot be changed back to its original values even if you click the Cancel button Store the preset values to the user program in the ROM with button operations on the SmartAXIS For operations on the SmartAXIS Pro see Chapter 6 HMI Function in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For operations on the SmartAXIS Touch see the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 9 2 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE e 9 THE COUNTER FB CUD Up Down Selection Reversible Counter The CUD FB increments or decrements the current value at every rising edge in the clock input Whether the current value is incremented or decremented is determined by the state of the up down selection input The current values are compared
129. Lower limit Output OUT Output W I Defines the range or the values handled with the comparison value lower Parameters OP Data type 9 limit and upper limit D double word rhe default is T integer L long ger 1 BO to B199 for the 12 I O type 2 When the data type is W the value can be specified within the range of 0 to 65 535 When the data type is I the value can be specified within the range of 32 768 to 32 767 When the data type is D the value can be specified within the range of 0 to 4 294 967 295 When the data type is L the value can be specified within the range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 3 constant specify the value within the valid range of the data type To indirectly specify the value with a device specify it with the device number where the value is stored and specify the content of the device within the valid range of the specified data type SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 11 5 11 THE COMPARISON FB Valid Devices Parameter Function Q TC TP CC CP B D Contat EN Execution input X X X X X X X DATA Comparison value X X X X X x X LL Upper limit X X X X X x X UL Lower limit X X X X X x X 1 For the Pro Lite and Touch relay output type an analog input FB can be specified only when I integer is specified as the data type For the Touch transistor output type an anal
130. Mode 0 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments Starting PULS2 Mode 1 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments 6 Output pulse frequency on Output pulse frequenc number 0 a PULS3 Mode 0 1 to 5 000 1 Hz increments page 15 3 PULS4 Mode 1 Cannot be specified Starting number 1 Starting number 2 Starting number 3 Starting number 4 Starting number 5 Starting number 6 Reserved Preset value upper 1 to 100 000 000 pulses 8 Preset value on page 15 4 Preset value lower Current value upper word 1 to 100 000 000 pulses 9 Current value on page 15 9 Current value lower Error status 0 to 4 10 Error status on page 15 4 1 The upper and lower data registers switch according to the setting of the 32 bit data storage method For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 15 2 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDEC 15 THE PULSE 3 INI Initialization Input INI specifies the initialization input When the initialization input is on the initial values configured in the Settings tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers The bit device such as an external input 10 to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are stored in the data registers with ea
131. OUNTER FB HOUR Hour Meter The HOUR FB measures and accumulates the ON time hours minutes seconds of the execution input The output is turned on when the accumulated time reaches the preset value Symbol EN HOUR RST OUT Operation description When the execution input EN is on the ON time hours minutes seconds of the execution input is measured and accumulated When the accumulated time is equal to or greater than the specified preset value hours minutes seconds the output OUT is turned on The accumulated ON time and the preset value hours minutes seconds use 3 devices In the preset value Hours can be configured in the range of 0 to 65 535 and the Minutes and Seconds can be configured in the range of 0 to 59 Notes When the accumulated ON time of the execution input exceeds 65 535 hours 59 minutes and 59 seconds 65536 is subtracted from the accumulated ON time stored in the specified devices Among the preset value Hours Minutes and Seconds data if one of those data is out of the valid range a user program execution error occurs and the output turns off However measuring the accumulated ON time continues For user program execution errors see the following chapters e SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Chapter 14 User Program Execution Error e SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Chapter 30 Troubleshooting Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 X Parameters Parameter Number C
132. On off When the execution input turns on the current value returns to 0 and the output turns on While the execution input is on the output is on When the execution input turns off the current value starts being incremented While the execution input is off the current value is incremented until it reaches the preset value RST Reset input On off The reset input has priority over the execution input When the reset input is on the output is off regardless of the on off state of the execution input When unconnected the reset input is handled as off Output OUT Output Even after the execution input turns off while the current value is incremented the output keeps on The output turns off when the current value is greater than or equal to the preset value TP Parameters Preset value 0 to 65 535 Specify the time interval off delay time from when the execution input turns off to when the output turns off The preset value can be specified using a constant or a data register 2 TU Time unit 1 TO to T99 for the 12 I O type 2 The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored ZIDEC 1 sec 100 ms 10 ms 1 ms Specify the time unit for the timer SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 7 8 THE TIMER
133. SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 4 9 4 FB REFERENCE Notes e Devices refer to memory areas that are prepared in advanced for specific purposes in the SmartAXIS and they are identified by the device type I Q M R AI T C D and B and the address Device values refer to the values stored in the memory areas specified by the device addresses e Devices that can be configured vary depending on each FB parameter You may also be able to configure constants instead of devices e For details on SmartAXIS device types see Device Addresses on page 3 1 Data types When using counter FBs comparison FBs data logging FBs and script FBs the data type can be set Arithmetic operations can be performed on a variety of data by specifying the data type sData type W word I integer D double word L long The unit and range of data that can be processed with data type W word I integer D double word and L long is as follows USE Number a Used Processable unit Data Range Abbreviation Name Data Registers Ww Word 1 Unsigned 16 bits 0 65 535 I Integer 1 Signed 15 bits 32 768 32 767 D Double word 2 Unsigned 32 bits 0 4 294 967 295 Long 2 Signed 31 bits 2 147 483 648 2 147 483 647 e For the data types that can be used with each FB see Applicable Data Types on page 4 8 Storage Method of 32 bit Data 32 bit D double word and L long word type data is stored in devices in the follo
134. T1A C14KA W FT1A C14KA B FT1A C14KA S FT1A M14SA W FT1A M14SA B FT1A M14SA S FT1A C14SA W FT1A C14SA B FT1A C14SA S 12 1 0 type SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 12 I O points FT1A B12RA FT1A B12RC FT1A H12RA FT1A H12RC 24 1 0 type SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 24 I O points FT1A B24RA FT1A B24RC FT1A H24RA FT1A H24RC 40 I O type SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 40 I O points FT1A B40RKA FT1A B40RSA FT1A B40RC FT1A H40RKA FT1A H40RSA FT1A H40RC SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with 48 I O points 48 1 0 type FT1A B48KA FT1A B48SA FT1A B48KC FT1A B48SC FT1A H48KA FT1A H48SA FT1A H48KC FT1A H48SC SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with an AC power supply AC power type FT1A B12RC FT1A H12RC FT1A B24RC FT1A H24RC FT1A B40RC FT1A H40RC FT1A B48KC FT1A B48SC FT1A H48KC FT1A H48SC SmartAXIS Pro and Lite models with a DC power supply DC power type FT1A B12RA FT1A H12RA FT1A B24RA FT1A H24RA FT1A B40RKA FT1A H40RKA FT1A B40RSA FT1A H40RSA FT1A B48KA FT1A B48SA FT1A H48KA FT1A H48SA SmartAXIS Touch with relay output FT1A M12RA W FT1A M12RA B FT1A M12RA S FT1A C12RA W FT1A C12RA B FT1A C12RA S SmartAXIS Touch with transistor output Touch Transistor output type FT1A M14KA W FT1A M14KA B FT1A M14KA S FT1A C14KA W FT1A C14KA B FT1A C14KA S FT1A M14SA W FT1A M14SA B FT1A M14SA S FT1A C14SA W FT1A C14SA B FT1A C14SA S Touch Relay output type Abbreviations
135. T1A M12RA B FT1A M12RA S FT1A C12RA W FT1A C12RA B FT1A C12RA S FT1A Touch FT1A M14KA W FT1A M14KA B FT1A M14KA S FT1A C14KA W FT1A C14KA B FT1A C14KA S FT1A M14SA W FT1A M14SA B FT1A M14SA S FT1A C14SA W FT1A C14SA B FT1A C14SA S If the Use as Default button is pressed then the same PLC and programming language will be selected as default when WindLDR is started next time DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 1 1 OPERATION BASICS 3 Select a PLC type in the selection box select FBD as the programming language and click OK Defaut 4 The WindLDR menu bar is updated and the FBD editor opens Starting WindLDR and PLC selection are now complete How to create a FBD program is described in the following pages 1 2 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 n DEC Creating FBD Program 1 OPERATION BASICS This section describes the procedure for creating a FBD program in WindLDR Note For details about the individual FB see FB Reference on page 4 1 Create a sample program using WindLDR that performs the following operations e When input IO and input I1 are both on output 00 is turned on e When either input I1 or input I2 is on output Q1 turns on and off continuously in one second cycle Circuit block Input IO Input I1 Input I2 Action QO ON ON Output QO is turned on OFF ON Qi Output 01 is turned on and
136. The reversible control value 0 1 cannot be changed The upper and lower data registers switch according to the setting of the 32 bit data storage method For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 15 12 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 3 INI Initialization Input 15 THE PULSE FB INI specifies the initialization input When the initialization input is on the initial values configured in the Settings tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers The bit device such as an external input 10 to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are stored in the data registers with each scan To initialize the values only one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU Shot up FB or the SOTD Shot down FB 4 D1 Operation Status D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with the RAMP FB Starting from the specified internal relay 4 consecutive internal relays are used The range of available internal relay numbers is MO to M1270 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Storage 2 destination Function Setting details This relay remains on during pulse output Starting Pulse output ON 0 Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when pulse output stops number 0
137. X X X X Pulse Output PULS Pulse Width Modulation PWM x Pulse Ramp Pulse Output RAMP Zero Return ZRN Advanced Ramp ARMP Data Log DLOG X X X X X Data Logging Data Trace TRACE X X X X X Script Script SCRPT X X X X X High speed Counter HSC X X Special RS Flip flop RSFF 1 When using the analog input cartridge AI2 to AI5 of the Touch transistor output type configure the data type of AI FB in the function area 48 settings For configuring the function area settings see Chapter 3 4 15 Analog Cartridge the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDEC FB Specifications 4 FB REFERENCE This section describes the FB specifications Basic FB configuration All FBs are composed of a FB symbol input connectors 4 maximum an output connector and a block number FBs operate according to the state of the input connectors and the internal parameters of the FB and output the result from the output connector 2 0100 3 4 Name Description 1 FB symbol The symbol that indicates the FB type Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order 2 Block number from zero The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used device address in any other FBs cannot be used If a tag name and comment are configured for
138. YEAR FB output OUT This setting is applied to all parameter tabs 5 check box When the current date reaches to the date in the ON settings the output is turned on for only one scan Cleared check box The output is turned on or off according to the ON settings and the OFF settings Parameter tab This tab configures the settings for the output A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for 1 YEAR FB YEAR Yearly Timer E ON settings 3 Month and Day Settings E Month January Oday iB Day of the week End of month 4 FF settings Year mos E Month and Day Settings Month January day BS Day of the week End of month Specify ON duration EIE January 2013 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr 4 5 6 7 8 90 1112 3 45 678 9 3 45 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 12 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 Su Mo Tu 27 28 29 30 31 24 25 26 February 2013 March 17 18 19 20 2 1 2 yearly Monthly 2223 We Th Fr Sa 6 7 8 9 13 14 15 16 27 28 29 30 1 Yearly When Yearly is selected the Month and Day settings or Specify ON duration are valid every year At this time specify the Year for ON settings as the valid starting year and the Year for OFF settings as the valid ending year 2 Monthly In addition to Yearly
139. ZRN Outputs pulses with the different pulse frequency corresponding to ZRN INI e X 15 21 BE S the on off state of a deceleration signal Advanced Ramp ARAMP FN ARAMP L our Output pulses with the frequency change function according to the X 15 26 settings configured the frequency table Data Logging FB Symbol Name and Diagram Function Output Refer to Inversion Data Log EN DLOG Saves the values of the specified devices in the specified data DLOG 16 1 format as a CSV file to the SD memory card Data Trace TRACE Saves the values of the previous number of scans for the specified TRACE EI OUT device in the specified data format as a CSV file to the SD memory 16 8 card Script FB Symbol Name and Diagram Function Output Refer to Inversion Script Enables you to program complicated processing with the script EN SCRPT OUT VR SCRPT language that supports conditional branching logical operations 17 1 IDEC arithmetic operations and functions SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 4 5 4 Special FB 3 Output Symbol Name and Diagram Function Inversion Refer to High speed Counter HSC Operates the high speed counter configured in the function area HSC m d settings Turns on off the high speed counter gate input reset X 18 1 CLR input clear input RS Flip flop SET RSFF OUT When the set input turns on the output turns on and keeps on
140. a CSV file with the same date does not exist in the specified folder the CSV file is created and the header and the log data is output Output example Time D0010 lt Header 2011 09 07 08 30 23 12345 Log data When a CSV file with the same date already exists the folder designated only the log data is appended to the CSV file Output example Time D0010 2011 09 07 08 30 23 12345 2011 09 07 17 30 23 1212 Appended log data When the DLOG FB is finished executing the completion output is turned on and the status code for the execution result is stored in the device specified by D1 For status codes see 2 D1 Execution Status on page 16 3 Notes e The time required to create a new CSV file create a file and output header is 510 us e When the SmartAXIS is started running after it is stopped and a DLOG FB is executed the header is appended to the CSV file even if the same DLOG FB is executed previously within the same day Output example Time D0010 Header 2011 09 07 08 30 23 12345 Log data Time D0020 Appended header 2011 09 07 17 30 23 1212 lt Log data e For details on the SD memory card specification see Chapter 5 Special Functions SD Memory Card in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 16 1 16 THE DATA LOGGING Notes The maximum number of DLOG
141. a at the 15th column on the second line and click Special Character Lo NK a Options Priority 0 E Acknowledgment LOD Display Settings sec gti 0000 Bit Device Text with Effect E Bar Graph E miim The Special Characters List window is popped up 13 Double click on C The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area MSG Message Options Priority 0 C Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display SpecialData Specialcharacter overwrite 14 14 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 THE INTERFACE FB Configuring the bar graph 14 Select the entire area on the third line and click Bar Graph MSG Message 9 Options Priority e B Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display Special Data Special Character Overwrite The Insert Bar Graph dialog box opens 15 Set Device to 00002 Data Type to Integer I Maximum to 50 Minimum t
142. al data registers are also described The SmartAXIS is programmed using devices such as inputs outputs remote inputs remote outputs internal relays timers counters shift registers and data registers Inputs I are relays to receive input signals through the input terminals Remote inputs I are relays to receive input signals from external devices connected to the remote I O slaves Outputs Q are relays to send the processed results of the user program to the output terminals Remote outputs O are relays to send output signals to external devices connected to the remote I O slaves Internal relays M are relays used in the CPU and cannot be output to the output terminals Special internal relays M are internal relays dedicated to specific functions Timers T are relays used in the user program available as 1 sec 100 ms 10 ms and 1 ms timers Counters C are relays used in the user program available as adding counter reversible counter and hour meter FBs Shift registers R are registers to shift the data bits according to pulse inputs Data registers D are registers used to store numerical data Special data registers D are dedicated to special functions Device Addresses Available I O numbers depend on the SmartAXIS type FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch Device Device Device Device Device Device s Address Address Reins Address ponts Address Address
143. alization input in combination with the SOTU Shot up FB or the SOTD Shot down FB 4 D1 Operation Status D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with the PWM FB Starting from the specified internal relay 3 consecutive internal relays are used The range of available internal relay numbers is MO to M1270 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 d n Function Setting details This relay turns on during pulse outputting Starting Pulse output ON 0 Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when pulse output stops number 0 1 Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are output and output completes Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when pulse output has completed number 1 complete 1 Pulse output complete This relay turns off during pulse outputting Starting Overflow 0 None When pulse counting is enabled this relay turns on in case a pulse number 2 1 An overflow has occurred is output that exceeds the preset value 1 The pulse output complete on off state is reflected in the PWM FB output OUT However when the execution input is off the PWM FB output OUT is off Parameter tab PWM Pulse Width Modulation Function Output pulse frequency 5 1 Pulse width ratio Pulse counting Preset value Current value Error status Devices Settings 100 50 Setting Disable
144. ally stored in the next preset value number By changing the value in the next preset value number the preset value to be active after the current comparison can be changed While the gate input is on the preset value and current value are compared Once the values equal the output OUT is turned on for 1 scan When the gate input is off the high speed counter does not perform the counting operation and the output is turned off Notes e When using the high speed counter High speed Counter must be configured in Configuration gt Function Area Settings gt Input Configuration gt Special Input in WindLDR For details see the following manuals Chapter 5 Special Functions High speed Counter the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Chapter 3 Projects 4 Special Functions 4 7 High speed Counter the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual e The special internal relays for the gate input reset input and clear input cannot be directly manipulated Use the HSC FB 18 2 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 I DE 18 THE SPECIAL RSFF RS Flip flop The output is turned on with the set input and maintained until the reset input is turned on Symbol SET RSFF OUT RST Operation When the set input SET is on the output OUT is turned on When the reset input RST is on the output is turned off The reset input is executed with a higher precedence than the set input When the reset input is
145. alue 3 11 D8061 Low Word D8062 High Word g Current Value Frequency every ston 341 D8063 Low Word Measurement Value I3 D8064 High spe d High Word 065 Counter Low Word Preset Value 3 11 L4 Group 3 13 SN NOM D8066 High Word Reset Value 3 11 D8067 Low Word D8068 High Word g Current Value Frequency Ey aca 3 11 D8069 Low Word Measurement Value I5 D8070 High speed High Word 077 Counter Low Word Preset Value 3 11 Group 4 15 D8072 High Word gt Reset Value 3 11 D8073 Low Word D8074 Backlight ON Time Every scan 3 12 D8075 D8076 Reserved D8077 Out of Analog Input Range Status 3 12 D8078 D8079 D8080 MAC Address Read only Every 1 sec 3 12 D8081 D8082 D8083 D8084 D8085 IP Address Current Data Read only Every 1 sec 3 12 D8086 D8087 D8088 D8089 Subnet Mask Current Data Read only Every 1 sec 3 12 D8090 D8091 D8092 D8093 Default Gateway Current Data Read only Every 1 sec 3 12 D8094 D8095 D8096 D8109 Reserved D8110 D8111 Connection 1 Connected IP Address Every 1 sec 3 12 D8112 D8113 D8114 D8115 Connection 2 Connected IP Address Every 1 sec 3 12 D8116 D8117 D8118 D8119 Connection 3 Connected IP Address Every 1 sec 3 12 D8120 D8121 D8122 D8129 Reserved D8130 Connection 1 Connected Port Number Every 1 sec 3 12 D8131 Connection 2 Connected Port Number Every 1 sec 3 12 D8132 Connection 3 C
146. ameter to a value that is smaller than the linear minimum conversion maximum value Linear 32768 to Specifies the maximum value in the range between 32768 and 32767 for the MAX conversion 32767 linear conversion Set this parameter to a value that is larger than the linear maximum conversion minimum value 1 The range for the analog input terminal number varies depending on the SmartAXIS type The special data registers are assigned to the analog input terminals individually 2 When using the analog input cartridge AI2 to AI5 of the Touch transistor output type the analog input FB linear conversion function cannot be used Configure the linear conversion in the function area settings For configuring the function area settings see Chapter 3 4 15 Analog Cartridge in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Product series Analog input terminal Special data register 12 type AIO to 2 inputs D8040 to D8041 AIO to AI3 4 inputs D8040 to D8043 A110 to AI17 8 inputs D8149 to D8156 24 type AI20 to AI27 8 inputs D8158 to D8165 A130 to AI37 8 inputs D8167 to D8174 AIO to AI5 6 inputs D8040 to D8045 A110 to AI17 8 inputs D8149 to D8156 40 type AI20 to AI27 8 inputs D8158 to D8165 A130 to AI37 8 inputs D8167 to D8174 AIO to AI7 8 inputs D8040 to D8047 A110 to AI17 8 inputs D8149 to D8156 48 type AI20 to AI27 8 inputs D8158 to D8165 AI30 to AI37
147. an For pulse output see 5 Pulse Output on page 13 4 or 13 7 e When the ON time is set to a value larger than 2359 when the OFF time is set to a value larger than 2400 or when the last two digits of the ON time OFF time are set to a value larger than 59 a user program execution error will occur e When the day of the week is not specified a user program execution error will occur e For user program execution errors see User Program Execution Error in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 1 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 X Parameters Parameter Number B FT1A 24 Function Block number FT1A 40 Range BO to B999 1 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X Description Block number of the function block The block number is automatically assigned in order from 0 but it can also be changed to the desired number However overlapping block numbers used in any other function blocks cannot be used EN Execution input On off When the execution input turns on the WEEK FB operates When the execution input is off the WEEK FB does not operate and the output is off Input INI Initialization input On off When configuring the day of week or time by specifying data registers the values configured in the WindLDR edit dialog box on the Parameter tab are stored in the data registers when the initialization input turns on
148. and configure the display options For details on inserting text with effects see Insert Text with Effect on page 14 7 2 Work Area This area is used when editing the LCD screen This area is for temporarily relocating text and device data Text and device data be moved between the LCD Screen and the Work Area with or W When the dialog is closed the work area data is discarded 3 Word Device Inserts a word device at the cursor position The value of the specified word device is displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD For details see Insert Word Device on page 14 5 4 Bit Device Inserts a bit device in the area specified by the cursor Two different items of text can be switched between and displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD according to the value of the specified bit device For details see Insert Bit Device on page 14 6 5 Text with Effect Inserts text in the area specified by the cursor The specified text is displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD For details see Insert Text with Effect on page 14 7 6 Bar Graph Inserts a bar graph in the area specified by the cursor The value of the specified device is displayed as a bar graph on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD For details see Insert Bar Graph on page 14 8 IDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 3 14 THE INTERFACE FB 7 Special Data Special data such as the current date and time can be entered at the cursor position Select the data to en
149. are selected the area at the top line in the selected range is used Lines 1 columns 1 to 24 14 8 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 14 THE INTERFACE FB 7 Blinking Settings Blink the bar graph when the value of the specified device exceeds the upper or lower limit For the blinking speed see MSG FB Common Settings on page 14 9 Blinking Settings Description Upper limit The bar graph is blinked when the value of the specified device is larger than the upper limit Lower limit The bar graph is blinked when the value of the specified device is smaller than the lower limit Maximum minimum upper limit and lower limit values must satisfy the following condition Min Lower limit lt Upper limit lt MSG FB Common Settings The common settings character set scroll unit scroll speed and blinking speed for the message to display can be configured The common settings are configured in the WindLDR Function Area Settings dialog box Note The common settings for the MSG FBs are applicable for all MSG FBs in the user program For the MSG FB individual settings see MSG FB Individual Settings on page 14 3 Function Area Settings dialog box Function Area Settings Run Stop Control Configure thefunctions using LCD on FT1A Memory Backup Backlight Settings Input Configuration Communication Ports Tu
150. aturday time hh mm ON time hh mm s E b Ri OFF settings OFF settings Day of the week Day of the week 7 Sunday 7 Monday E Tuesday V Wednesday F Thursday 9 Friday Saturday 7 Sunday Monday E Tuesday V Wednesday T Friday E Saturday OFF time hh mm OFF time hh mm EE Preview Week Day OAN H Preview Week Day LU OFF Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Data Register Allocation Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Data Register Allocation On tab 3 configure the output to turn on Monday Wednesday and Friday from 22 00 to 0 00 the next day WEEK Weekly Timer ENT Devices Pa 2 settings Day of the week 7 Sunday 7 Monday Tuesday V Wednesday Thursday ON time hh mm OFF settings Day of the week 1 Sunday Monday E Tuesday V Wednesday F Thursday OFF time hh mm B Preview Week Day A Ml 7 Friday Saturday V Friday Saturday OFF Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Data Register Allocation Saturday m Configure the tabs as shown above and connect the WEEK FB output to Q000 13 10 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 indirectly specify the settings with data registers 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB This example describes turning on
151. automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used Number B Block number BO to B999 1 When the execution input is the comparison value is compared with the EN On off lower upper limits and the output is turned on or off When the execution input is off the output is turned off The comparison value Comparison This value can be specified as an analog input a data register a timer current value value preset value a counter current value preset value or a constant Unconnected inputs are handled as 0 Input The upper limit value This value can be specified as an analog input a data register a timer current value preset value a counter current value preset value or a constant Unconnected inputs are handled as 0 The lower limit value This value can be specified as an analog input a data register a timer current value preset value a counter current value preset value or a constant Unconnected inputs are handled as 0 When the execution input is on the output is turned on off as described below 1 When comparison value lower limit or comparison value upper limit the output is turned on 2 When lower limit comparison value lt upper limit the output is turned off When the execution input is off the output is off DATA UL Upper limit 2 LL
152. bes PLC selection and configuring the programming method 1 From the Start menu of Windows select Programs gt Automation Organizer V2 gt WindLDR gt WindLDR WindLDR starts Ls a g project01 pjw WINDLDR Let Configuration Online View gt bic Eraser Increment 75 t b mc _ Horizontal Decrement Join Vertical Select Basic Advanced Macro Draw Col Ri Bin gt m ine invert Comment 2 Delete 2 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configuration gt PLC gt PLC Type The PLC Selection dialog box is displayed PLC Selection IER FCRC FC4A C10R2X us IFC4A C 16R2X 4 24 2 4 020 3 IFC4A D20RX1 4 040 3 FC5A C10R2X FC5A C16R2X IFC5A C24R2X FCSA D16RX1 FC5A D32X3 FC5A D12X1E FT1A 12 1 40 FT1A 48 Ladder FBD Use as Default Default Fra In WindLDR the SmartAXIS is classified by the number of inputs and outputs and the names of product series are listed as follows PLC Selection Option SmartAXIS Type No FT1A 12 FT1A H12RA FT1A B12RA FT1A H12RC FT1A B12RC FT1A 24 FT1A H24RA FT1A B24RA FT1A H24RC FT1A B24RC FT1A 40 FT1A H40RKA FT1A H40RSA FT1A B40RKA FT1A B40RSA FT1A H40RC FT1A B40RC FT1A 48 FT1A H48KA FT1A H48SA FT1A B48KA FT1A B48SA FT1A H48KC FT1A H48SC FT1A B48KC FT1A B48SC FT1A M12RA W F
153. blem depending on the system For details see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer Timer Accuracy on page 8 3 8 8 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE e TIMOD Off delay Count Down Timer When the execution input turns off counting starts and the current value is decremented When the elapsed time reaches the specified off delay time the output turns off Symbol TRG TIMOD RST 1 sec TRG TIMOD RST 10 ms Operation OUT OUT 8 THE TIMER FB TRG TIMOD OUT RST 100 ms TRG TIMOD OUT RST 1ms When the execution input TRG turns on while the reset input RST is off the current value returns to preset value and the output OUT turns on While the execution input is on the output is on When the execution input turns off the current value starts being decremented Even after the execution input turns off the output keeps on until the current value reaches 0 When the current value reaches 0 the output turns off While the counting is proceeding if the execution input turns on the current value returns to the preset value When the reset input turns on the output immediately turns off regardless of the on off state of the execution input Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Parameters Function X X X Parameter Range Description Unique number to identify the Timer function block Number Timer number to T199 4
154. can be used The preset value be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored FB TIMOU TIMOU TIMOU TIMOU 1 sec 100 ms 10 ms 1ms The range of Preset value 0 to 65535 seconds 0 to 6553 5 seconds 0 to 655 35 seconds 0 to 65 535 seconds e The time numbers T already used any other timer FBs cannot be used e Ifthe preset value for the off delay count up timer is changed during counting the timer operates as follows 1 If the changed preset value is larger than the current value counting continues until the current value reaches the changed preset value 2 If the changed preset value is less than or equal to the current value the output immediately turns off The preset values can be changed by external devices such as operator interfaces WindLDR and LCD and buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro Touch The changed preset values are stored in the RAM and the changes are not reflected to the user program saved in the ROM When the SmartAXIS is turned off the changed preset values are reset to the original values stored in the ROM e For details on how to store the changed preset value to the user program in the ROM see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer on page 8 1 Sincethe timer has advance error or behind error that error may become a pro
155. ces Data register settings Tag Name Device Address Comment Pulse Output S2 The number of parameter tabs 1 2013 Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa n 18 24 25 eme preview shows the ON OFF state for the output based the settings configured on the parameter tabs calendar The dates that are set to ON are highlighted in orange Three months are shown at one time Item Content Year Specifies the year to show in the preview Scrollbar Change the month shown in the preview by moving the scrollbar 13 16 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE e d 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB Configuring the dates by specifying data registers The dates for the ON OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data registers The dates for the ON OFF settings can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running When the date in the ON OFF settings is changed while the YEAR FB execution input is on the changed data register values are reflected when the current date and time reaches 0 00 on the date specified by the ON OFF settings Device tab YEAR Yearly Timer Devies pa 1 7 Data register settings S1 First DR INI Initialization Input 3 DataRegisteralloation 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 1
156. ch may cause serious accidents configure monitor circuits outside the SmartAXIS e The SmartAXIS self diagnostic function may detect internal circuit or program errors stop programs and turn outputs off Configure circuits so that the system containing the SmartAXIS is not jeopardized when outputs turn off Turn off power to the SmartAXIS before installation removal wiring maintenance and inspection of the SmartAXIS Failure to turn power off may cause electrical shocks or fire hazard e Special expertise is required to install wire program and operate the SmartAXIS People without such expertise must not use the SmartAXIS e Install the SmartAXIS according to the instructions described in SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual and SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Improper installation will result in falling failure or malfunction of the SmartAXIS e The SmartAXIS is designed for installation in a cabinet Do not install the SmartAXIS outside a cabinet e Install the SmartAXIS in environments described in SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual and SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual If the SmartAXIS is used in places where the SmartAXIS is subjected to high temperature high humidity condensation corrosive gases excessive vibrations and excessive shocks then electrical shocks fire hazard or malfunction will result e The environment for using the SmartAXIS is Pollution degree 2 Use the SmartAXIS in environments of pollution degree 2 according t
157. ch scan To initialize the values only one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU Shot up FB or the SOTD Shot down FB 4 D1 Operation Status D1 specifies the starting number of the internal relays to use with the PULS FB Starting from the specified internal relay 3 consecutive internal relays are used The range of available internal relay is MO to M1270 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Storage destination Function Setting details This relay turns on during pulse outputting Starting Pulse output ON 0 Pulse output OFF This relay turns off when pulse output stops number 0 1 Pulse output ON This relay turns off when the specified number of pulses are output and output completes Starting Pulse output 0 Pulse output not complete This relay turns on when pulse output has completed number 1 complete 1 Pulse output complete This relay turns off during pulse outputting Starting Overflow 0 None When pulse counting is enabled this relay turns on when a pulse is number 2 1 An overflow has occurred output that exceeds the preset value 1 The pulse output complete on off state is reflected in the PULS FB output OUT However when the execution input is off the PULS FB output OUT is off Parameter tab PULS Pulse Output 9 Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Operation mode 5 1 Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Output puls
158. cial FB includes the high speed counter and the flip flop FBs HSC High speed Counter Controls the specified high speed counter configured in the function area settings The HSC FB turns on off gate input reset input and clear input of the high speed counter Symbol GT HSC OUT RST CLR Operation The HSC FB controls the gate input reset input and clear input of the high speed counter When the reset input RST is off and the gate input GT is turned on the counting begins for the incoming pulses to the pulse input of the high speed counter When the current value reaches to the preset value the output OUT is turned on for 1 scan The high speed counter settings are configured in the Function Area Settings dialog box in WindLDR The reset value or the initial values in control registers can be configured using other FBs such as SCRPT FB For details on the high speed counter see the following manuals e Chapter 5 Special Functions High speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e Chapter 3 Projects 4 Special Functions 4 7 High speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numb
159. cify the data register number where the preset value is stored SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 9 8 THE TIMER Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP cc B D AI Constant TRG Execution input X X X X X X X RST Reset input X X X X X X X TP Preset value X X Timing Chart The output does not turn off since the execution input is off for a shorter time than the off delay time the output does not turn on the output turns off pa eet TRG orr L mE Reset input ON RST ore N id tod NET i tog Output ON rot NE OUT o i EA E Io de bL t When the reset NE When the reset input is Off delay time 1 input turns on rod Off delay time Change in current value i Preset value When the execution input TRG turns on while the reset input RST is off the current value returns to preset value and the output OUT turns on While the execution input is on the output is on When the execution input turns off the current value starts being decremented Even after the execution input turns off the output keeps on until the current value reaches 0 When the current value reaches 0 the output turns off While the counting is proceeding if the execution input turns
160. compared and the output turns on or off according to the X 11 3 ON i GEE comparison result Range Comparison EN RCMP out The comparison input value and the upper lower limits are RCMP DATA compared and the output turns on or off according to the X 11 5 comparison result Data Conversion FB Symbol Name and Diagram Function Rennie Refer to Alternate Output TRG ALT OUT ALT SET Sets resets the output X 12 1 RST Week Programmer FB Symbol Name and Diagram Function Bani Refer to Weekly Timer EN WEEK OUT Compares the specified day of the week ON time and OFF time WEEK INI F 13 1 with the current time and outputs the result Yearly Timer EAR m YEAR OUT Compares the specified date with the current date and outputs the jns result Interface FB Symbol Name and Diagram Function 1 Refer to Message niga EN MSG OUT Displays data such as text and device values on the LCD on the x TE SmartAXIS Pro 4 4 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDEC 4 FB REFERENCE Pulse FB Output Symbol Name and Diagram Function Inversion Refer to Pulse Output PULS nt em FEES Outputs pulses at the specified frequency X 15 1 Pulse Width Modulation PWM 71 Outputs pulses at the specified frequency and cycle X 15 6 Ramp Pulse Output RAMP nu te RAME ee Outputs pulses with the frequency change function X 15 11 DIR Zero Return EN
161. complete 0051 0000 Pulse output state M0052 When the RAMP FB execution input 10 is on pulses are output according to the settings configured by the control registers e M50 is on during pulse output M52 is on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing e Pulses are output so that the pulse frequency reaches the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency in the frequency change time The pulse frequency increases or decreases every 10 ms during the frequency change time e Pulse output stops when the number of pulses configured by the preset value are output At this time M50 turns off M51 turns on and QO turns on e If the RAMP1 FB execution input 10 turns off during pulse output pulse output stops immediately If the execution input turns on again the pulse count is reset and the operation starts from the beginning e Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected in pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the RAMP1 FB execution input turns from off to on e The state of the initialization input MO are not reflected while the RAMP1 FB execution input 10 is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the execution input TIDEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 15 15 THE PULSE RAMP1 FB re
162. connected to the output FB digital output FB or internal relay FB are executed sequentially from the input FBs The FBD program processing time in one scan is approximately equal to the total of execution time of each FB For the execution time of each FB refer to FB Execution Time on page A 2 If the processing time for one scan exceeds the specified time for the watchdog timer a watchdog timer error occurs and the system is reset For details on the watchdog timer see the following manuals Chapter 5 Special Functions Watchdog Timer Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Chapter 3 Project 4 Special Functions 4 14 Watchdog Timer Setting in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Scan End Processing Time After processing the FBD program the SmartAXIS processes housekeeping operations at the end of each scan It is referred to as Scan End processing This includes the operations such as I O refreshing and error checking Item Processing Time Scan End Processing 1 msec min 1 DE SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 A 1 APPENDIX FB Execution Time FB Device and Execution time psec Group Name Symbol Condition Pro Lite Touch Logical AND AND 28 9 73 0 Negative Logical AND NAND 28 9 73 2 Logical OR OR 29 0 73 2 Negative Logical OR NOR 29 0 73 0
163. control registers Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch m X Note X Note These instructions cannot be used with FT1A HAORC and FT1A BAORC Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Numbe B Block numbe BO to B999 oe The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used When the execution input is on pulses are output from the pulse output EN Execution input On off port according to the control register S1 settings When the execution input is off the pulse output stops Input INI Initialization On off When the initialization input is on the initial values configured in the Settings input tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers Deceleration DE signal input On off The pulse frequency changes when the deceleration signal input turns on Output OUT Output E When the pulse output has completed the output turns on and keeps on It turns off when the execution input turns on Pulse output port ZRN1 ZRN2 Specify the pulse output port number for the ZRN FB The pulse output port number differs with ZRN1 and ZRN2 DO to D997 Specify the starting number of the data registers to use with the ZRN FB Parameters 51 Contro
164. ct the output frequency range from following operation modes Select the operation mode according to the steady pulse frequency and the initial pulse frequency used 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz 1 Hz increments Operation mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz 10 Hz increments 1 The output frequency error is within 5 6 Steady pulse frequency This setting specifies the steady pulse frequency after the pulse frequency finishes increasing For operation mode 0 set the frequency in the range of 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments For operation mode 1 set the frequency in the range of 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 13 15 THE PULSE 7 Initial pulse frequency Specify the frequency when pulse output starts For operation mode 0 set the frequency in the range of 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments For operation mode 1 set the frequency in the range of 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments 8 Frequency change time Specify the time to increase and decrease the pulse frequency Set the time in the range of 10 to 10 000 ms in 10 ms increments The first digit of the setting is ignored 9 Reversible control enable This setting enables or disables reversible control and selects the reversible control method from the following reversible control modes Reversible control enable 0 Disable 1 Single pulse output 2 Dual pulse output The details of reversible control mode are as follows
165. cy Setting details 1 to 1 000 1 Hz increments Reference 5 Output pulse frequency on page 15 8 Starting number 1 Pulse duty cycle ON ratio 1 to 100 6 Pulse width ratio on page 15 8 Starting number 2 Preset value upper 1 to 100 000 000 pulses Starting number 3 Preset value lower word 8 Preset value on page 15 9 Starting number 4 Current value upper 1 to 100 000 000 pulses Starting number 5 Current value lower 9 Current value on page 15 9 Starting number 6 Error status 0to4 10 Error status on page 15 9 1 The upper and lower data registers switch according to the setting of the 32 bit data storage method For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 7 15 THE PULSE 3 INI Initialization Input INI specifies the initialization input When the initialization input is on the initial values configured in the Settings tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers The bit device such as an external input 10 to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan To initialize the values only one time use the initi
166. d the output is turned on or off When the execution input is off the output is turned off W word I integer Defines the range of the values handled with the comparison value ON Parameters OP1 Data type threshold and OFF threshold D double word i The default is I integer L long 1 to B199 for the 12 I O type 2 When the data type is W the value can be specified within the range of 0 to 65 535 When the data type is I the value can be specified within the range of 32 768 to 32 767 When the data type is D the value can be specified within the range of 0 to 4 294 967 295 When the data type is L the value can be specified within the range of 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 3 constant specify the value within the valid range of the data type To indirectly specify the value with a device specify it with the device number where the value is stored and specify the content of the device within the valid range of the specified data type SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 11 3 11 THE COMPARISON FB Valid Devices Parameter Function 1 Q R T TC C CC CP B D Contat EN Execution input X X X X X X X DATA Comparison value X X X X X x X ON ON threshold X X X X x X OFF OFF threshold X X X X X x X 1 For the Pro Lite and Touch relay output type an analog input FB be specified only when I
167. d the data type specified by OP 12 0 type If the data type is W word 3 counters are used and the counter number can be specified in the range of CO to C97 If the data type is D double word 6 counters are used and the counter number can be specified in the range of CO to C94 24 40 48 1 types SmartAXIS Touch If the data type is W word 3 counters are used and the counter number can be specified in the range of CO to C197 If the data type is D double word 6 counters are used and the counter number can be specified in the range of CO to C194 2 The valid range differs according to the data type specified by OP When the data type is W word For a constant set the value in the range of 0 to 65 535 To indirectly specify the value with a data register pody it with the data register number where the value is stored and specify the content of the data register in the range of 0 to 65 535 When the data type is D double word For a constant set the value in the range of 0 to 4 294 967 295 To indirectly specify the value with a data register specify it with the data register number where the value is stored and specify the content of the data register in the range of 0 to 4 294 967 295 1 DE SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 9 3 9 THE COUNTER FB Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP B D AI Constant PRST Preset input X X X X X X
168. d the number of FBs can be calculated as described below Block Number of Used devices FB Size Qty of Bytes number Block B Timer T Counter C Ii I Input Input Input Inputs analog inputs and internal relays do not affect the FBD program 14 1 Input size or the number of used devices All Al Analog Input M0003 M Internal Relay B1 Logical AND 12 1 0 0 B2 OR Logical OR 12 1 0 0 B3 STTG I Schmitt Trigger 20 1 0 0 C10 CNT W Adding Counter 12 0 0 1 Total 56 Program size 3 0 1 n DEC SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 5 APPENDIX A 6 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE INDEX n Q Adding Counter CNT 9 1 Advanced Ramp ARAMP 15 26 Alternate Output ALT 12 1 Analog Input AI 5 4 Communication Adapter Information 3 10 CSV File 16 5 Data Comparison CMP 11 1 Data Log DLOG 16 1 Data Trace TRACE 16 8 Data types 4 10 Digital Input I 5 1 Digital Output Q 6 1 Download Program 1 12 Dual Timer DTIM 8 16 Exclusive Logical OR XOR 7 5 FB devices 4 9 Handling numeric values in floating point arithmetic operations 4 11 High speed Counter HSC 18 1 Hour Meter HOUR 9 7 Internal Relay M 6 2 Logical AND AND 7 1 Logical OR 7 3 Message MSG 14 1 Monitor Function 1 14 Monitor Operation 1 14 Negation 7 7 Negative Exclusive Logical
169. e The output connector of the input 10 and input 1 connector of the AND are connected SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 Help 1 OPERATION BASICS Insert output QO and connect it to the output of the AND BO 1 From the WindLDR menu bar click Home gt Function Block gt Terminal gt Q Digital Output Configuration Online View Help 1 Digital Input SM Special Internal Relay R hift Register rer i oe RAE op ee ng ORS SEEN A ETE AI Analog Input RRs Bee ee ee s 0 aiReay cM EM M M ME Output 00 is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer 3 Connect the output connector of the AND BO and the input connector of the output QO with a connection line Connect them in the same manner as Connect input 10 and AND BO with a connection line on page 1 5 10000 1 6 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 1 OPERATION BASICS Insert input I1 and connect it to the input 2 of the AND BO Insert input 11 in the same manner as Insert input 10 page 1 3 and connect it to the input 2 of the AND BO with a connection line in the same manner as Connect input 10 and AND BO with a connection line on page 1 5 I0000 10001 Insert input I2 and XOR B1 and connect input I1 and input I2 to the i
170. e CSV file every 10 seconds Output results Time D0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010 2012 02 06 10 20 30 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823E 38 2012 02 06 10 20 40 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823E 38 2012 02 06 10 20 50 12345 0 0 56789 0 0 3 402823E 38 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 16 7 16 THE DATA LOGGING TRACE Data Trace The TRACE FB saves the values of the previous number of scans for the specified device in the specified data format as a CSV file to the SD memory card Symbol EN TRACE OUT Operation When the execution input EN turns on the date and time and the value s of the previous numbers of scans for the specified device s are output to the CSV file in the specified folder When the execution is finished the completion output OUT is turned on and the execution status is stored in the specified device When the specified folder does not exist the SD memory card that folder is created The folder path is DATAQ001 TRACE User specified folder For details on the folder structure see Chapter 5 Special Functions SD Memory Card in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual The CSV file name is DATE csv The date when the TRACE FB is turned on is used as DATE Example If the date is September 30 2011 the file name is 20110930 csv When a CSV file with the same date does not exist in the folder designated by 51 the CSV fil
171. e FBs 1 14 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 1 OPERATION BASICS Quit WindLDR 1 From the Application menu eb Click Exit WindLDR TESTO1 pjw WINDLDR o P oen E try ait Aras Pon ONE en DX uc EL 25525005 260 WindLDR exits n DE SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 15 1 OPERATION BASICS 1 16 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 2 BASIC OPERATIONS ON THE MODULE Introduction You can run and stop the SmartAXIS monitor device values and modify settings of the SmartAXIS Pro and Touch with the LCD and operation buttons on the module without using WindLDR This chapter describes the basic operations of the operation buttons Notes e For other functions of the SmartAXIS Pro refer to the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e For other functions of the SmartAXIS Touch refer to the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Basic Operations LCD and Operation Buttons SmartAXIS Pro The standard screen the system menu and custom messages can be displayed a a on the LCD RUN The operation buttons are laid out on SmartAXIS Pro as shown in the diagram on the right A total of six buttons left
172. e TRACE FB are turned on To execute the TRACE FB again confirm that the previous data writing process has finished and then execute the instruction Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch pem X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block B BO to B999 The block number is automatically assigned in order 0 but it can also be changed to the desired number However overlapping block numbers used in any other function blocks cannot be used When the execution input turns on the date and time and the value s of Input EN Execution input ON OFF the specified device s are output to the CSV file in the specified folder When the execution input is off the TRACE FB does not operate The completion output turns on when the data writing process and the Output OUT Completion output execution of the TRACE FB are completed This turns on regardless of the success or failure of output to the SD memory card S1 Folder name String The SD memory card folder name Parameters Specify the data register to store the status code The status code is stored Di Execution status according to the TRACE FB execution status and result 1 Specify the SD memory card folder name as the desired text up to 8 single byte alphanumeric characters Valid Devices Parameter Function 1I Q R T TC TP C
173. e error does not occur at the timer input and timeout output s t Scan time Tet Tte 1 s t Timer FB clock increment 1 ms 10 ms 100 ms 1 sec The maximum advance error Time unit 1 s t Time unit The maximum lag error 3 s t The timer input error and timeout output error shown above do not include the input response time behind error and output response time behind error caused by hardware Power Failure Memory Protection The Timer FBs do not have power failure protection A timer 1 sec timer 100 ms timer 10 ms timer with this protection can be devised using a counter FB and special internal relay M8121 1 sec clock M8122 100 ms clock or M8123 10 ms clock I0000 10 ms Clock M8123 C000 In this case specify the adding counter CNT FB C2 to keep the current value For details on retaining the current value see Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep Designation in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 8 4 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 THE TIMER TIMD On delay Count Down Timer When the execution input turns on the counting starts and the current value is decremented When the elapsed time reaches the specified on delay time the output turns on Symbol TRG TIMD OUT TRG TIMD OUT 1 sec 100 ms TRG TIMD OUT TRG TIMD OUT 10 ms 1 ms Operation When the execution input TRG turns on the current value starts being decremented Wh
174. e frequency from the initial pulse frequency e Pulse output stops when the pulses configured by the preset value are output At this time M50 turns off and M51 turns on e If the ARAMP1 FB execution input turns off during pulse output pulse output is stopped If the ARAMP1 FB execution input turns on again the pulse count is reset and pulse counting starts e Even if the contents of the control registers are changed during pulse output the change is not reflected in the pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the ARAMP1 FB is started The changes from the initialization input MOO are not reflected while the ARAMP1 FB execution input is If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input M00 on after turning off the ARAMP1 FB execution input Fi DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 33 15 THE PULSE ARAMP1 FB reversible control enabled single pulse output mode timing chart ARAMP1 FB EN is specified as external input IO INI is specified as internal relay M0000 INT is not connected S1 is specified as data register D0200 D1 is specified as data register D0000 and D2 is specified as internal relay M0050 10000 ARAMP1 FB execution input 10 Control direction 0 Forward 1 Reverse Output pulse 014 Reversible 016 40 1 0 type control signal 012 48 1 0 type Pulse output ON M0050
175. e frequency 6 100 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Pulse counting 7 Disable pulse counting PULS 1 and PULS 2 instructions only Preset value 8 4 1 to 100 000 000 Current value 9 1 to 100 000 000 Error status 1 0 5 Operation mode Select the frequency range to output from two operation modes PULS3 and PULS4 only support operation mode 0 2 Supported PULS FB Operation mode PULS1 PULS2 PULS3 PULS4 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz 1 Hz increments PULS1 PULS2 x x x x 1 Hz to 5 kHz 1 Hz increments PULS3 PULS4 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz 10 Hz increments 1 X X 1 The output frequency error is within 5 6 Output pulse frequency PULS1 PULS2 Mode 0 Set between 1 Hz and 10 kHz in 1 Hz increments The output frequency error is within 5 Mode 1 Set between 200 Hz and 100 kHz in 10 Hz increments The output frequency error is within 5 PULS3 PULS4 Set between 1 Hz and 5 kHz in 1 Hz increments The output frequency error is within 5 7 Pulse counting Specify enabling or disabling pulse counting Supported PULS FB PULS1 PULS2 PULS3 PULS4 0 Disable pulse counting Pulses are continuously output while the execution input is on X X X X 1 Enable pulse counting The number of pulses specified by the preset value are output X X Pulse counting SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 3 15 THE PULSE 8 9 Preset value For
176. e frequency was not set between 1 and 10 000 in operation mode 0 designation error The steady pulse frequency was not set between 20 and 10 000 in operation mode 1 5 Frequency nange time The frequency change time was not set between 10 and 10 000 designation error 8 Exceeded pulse number error The number of frequency change pulses exceed the preset total number of output pulses 9 The initial pulse frequency was set to the same frequency as the steady pulse frequency or it was set to a value larger than the steady pulse frequency 1 The number of pulses in the frequency change area calculated by the initial pulse frequency steady pulse frequency and frequency change time has exceeded the preset total number of output pulses Adjust the settings by decreasing the steady or initial pulse frequency or by shortening the frequency change time 2 Setthe initial pulse frequency so that it is lower than the steady pulse frequency Operation example RAMP1 FB reversible control disabled timing chart For RAMP1 FB the external input IO is connected to EN the internal relay MO is connected to INI D200 is specified to S1 the internal relay M5O is specified to D1 1000 RAMP1 0000 0000 When the execution When the number of output input turns on pulses equals the specified number i pulse output starts of pulses pulse output stops RAMP FB execution input 1000 Output pulse 014 Pulse output M0050 Pulse output
177. e in the execution input and the output is reset at another Output OUT Output rising edge in the execution input When the set input and the reset input are on the output is set reset according to the operation mode The input precedence order when the set input and the reset input are Reset input simultaneously on can be specified Operation precedence Set input precedence The set input is executed with a higher precedence Parameters OP mode set input than the reset input precedence Reset input precedence The reset input is executed with a higher precedence than the set input The default is reset input precedence 1 BO to B199 for the 12 I O type Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T cc B D AI Constant TRG Execution input X X X X X X X x SET Set input X X X X X X X RST Reset input X X X X X X X IDEC SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 12 1 12 THE DATA CONVERSION Timing Chart 1 Reset input precedence The output is set with a rising The output is set when The reset input is executed with a higher edge in the execution input the set input is on precedence than the set input ON Execution input TRG OFF Set input SET 1 OFF Reset input RST OFF Output OUT output is reset with another The output is reset when rising edge in the execution input the res
178. e is created and the trace data is output The oldest data is output at the top of the trace data and the latest data is output at the bottom of the trace data Output example Triggered at 2012 02 06 08 30 23 Header row 1 Scan D0010 Header row 2 Old 12345 lt Data 2 scans before 12345 lt Data 1 scan before New 12345 Latest data When a CSV file with the same date already exists in the folder designated by S1 the header and trace data are appended to the CSV file Output example Triggered at 2012 02 06 08 30 23 Scan D0010 Old 12345 12345 New 12345 Triggered at 2012 02 06 17 16 15 Appended header row 1 Scan D0010 Appended header row 2 Old 1212 Appended data 2 scans before 1212 lt Appended data 1 scan before New 1212 Appended latest data When the TRACE FB is finished executing the completion output is turned on and the status code for the execution result is stored in the device specified by D1 For status codes see 2 D1 Execution Status on page 16 10 Notes e The TRACE instruction accumulates data while SmartAXIS is running but does not accumulate data when SmartAXIS is stopped e Data is accumulated while SmartAXIS is running even when the execution input to the TRACE FB is off e When the execution input to the TRACE FB is turned on the accumulated data is output to the CSV file e The ti
179. e of 00000 to the CSV files with the data type W word 4 Set the repeat to 6 to output the values of D0000 through D0005 to the CSV files 5 Configure D0010 to output the decimal value of D0010 to the CSV files with the data type F float DLOG Data Logging EN Devices Settings S Foldername Tag Device address Display Type Repeat 3 00000 4 00000 DEC W 5 00010 00010 DEC w mi Logging data size Remaining size 38 bytes MAX 1024bytes 986 bytes Cancel The configuration is now completed Operation Description 16 THE DATA LOGGING 10 seconds after 0000 is turned on the DLOG FB is executed one time When the DLOG FB is executed the data of 00000 through D0005 and D0010 are output to the CSV file on the SD memory card as decimal values along with the current date and time The saved location of CSV files is DATAO0011DATALOGWESULT The oldest data is saved at the top of the log data and the latest data is saved at the bottom of the log data When the execution of the DLOG FB is complete the completion output of the DLOG FB is turned on and the CMP FB is executed once The CMP FB compares the status code stored in the execution status D0100 with 0 and turns 00 on or off 00 is turned on when an error occurs in the DLOG FB While MO is on the log data is appended to th
180. e operation mode is time precedence Even when the execution input turns off the output keeps on for the length of time specified by the preset value When the elapsed time reaches the preset value the output turns off When the reset input turns on the output immediately turns off Notes TO to T199 can be used for the timer number However for the 12 I O type TO to T99 can be used e The preset value be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored FB SPULS 1 sec SPULS 100 ms SPULS 10 ms SPULS 1ms The range of Preset 0 to 65535 seconds 0 to 6553 5 seconds 0 to 655 35 seconds 0 to 65 535 seconds value e The time number T already used in any other timer FBs cannot be used e If the preset value for the single shot pulse is changed during counting the single shot pulse operates as follows 1 Ifthe changed preset value is larger than the current value counting continues until the current value reaches the changed preset value 2 If the changed preset value is less than or equal to the current value counting stops and the output turns off immediately e The preset values can be changed by external devices such as operator interfaces WindLDR and LCD and buttons on the SmartAXIS Touch The changed preset values are sto
181. e output continues even if the overflow occurs during number 3 1 Overflow occurred steady pulse output or while the pulse frequency is changing However pulse counting current value data register is suspended at the point when the overflow occurred This relay is off when the control direction of the pulses being Startin 0 Forward output is forward 9 Control direction i TR number 4 1 Reverse This relay is on when the control direction of the pulses being output is reverse 1 The pulse output complete on off state is reflected in the ARAMP FB output OUT However when the execution input is off the ARAMP FB output OUT is off 2 If reversible control is enabled the control direction input on off state is reflected 15 30 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 uParameter tab 15 THE PULSE ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table Devices Settings Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description lOperation mode 7 Mode 0 1 Hzto 10kHz 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Reversible control enable 8 Disabled Number of steps 9 1 1to 18 steps Start step number 10 1 1to 1 step Interrupt step number 1 1 1 1to 1 step Cancel 7 Operation mode Select the output frequency range from following operation modes Operation mode 0 1Hzto 10 kHz 1 Hz increments 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz 10 Hz increments 1 The output
182. e reset input is Specify the time interval on delay time from when the execution input turns 1 On delay time 0 to 65 535 on to when the output turns on The On delay time value can be specified using a constant or a data register 2 Specify the time interval off delay time from when the execution input turns TP2 Off delay time 0 to 65 535 off to when the output turns off The Off delay time value can be specified using a constant or a data register 2 1 sec 100 ms Specify the time unit for the timer TU Timeunit 10 ms 1 ms Common in TP1 and TP2 Parameters 1 TO to T99 for the 12 I O type 2 The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored TIDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 11 8 THE TIMER Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP cc B D AI Constant TRG Execution input X X X X X X X RST Reset input X X X X X X X 1 On delay time X X TP2 Off delay time X X Timing Chart When the reset input is on the output is off ON Execution input DE TRG i E i x j E Reset input OFF i i i RM i RST l ow X ON E Cicer s L Lee 771277771220 OUT am Fd AE EN
183. e second line and click Text with Effect MSG Message IN Options Priority 0 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display SpecialData Special Character Insert 0000 BarGraph um am 2220 i Note The text can also be entered directly on the LCD screen area In the sample above move the cursor to the start of the second line and enter Now with the keyboard When you directly enter the text proceed to Configuring the word device on page 14 13 step 9 The Insert Text with Effect dialog box opens 7 In Text enter Now with the keyboard Under Display Option disable all of the options Insert Text with Effect 2 Display Option E Scroll Blinking Ej Invert Occupied Area Row x Column 1x6 Input Text Directly Special Character Overwrite No Cancel 14 12 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 THE INTERFACE FB 8 After the settings are configured click OK The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area MSG Message EN Options Priority 0 4 E Acknowledgment LOD Display Settings LCD Display SpecialData Special Character Overwrite Word Device Text with effect Bargraph 27 mit 22
184. e set input Set input ON SET OFF Reset input RST Output OUT When the reset input is on When the reset input is off and the set the output is reset input is on the output is turned on When the reset input RST is off and the set input SET is turned on the output OUT is turned on The output state is maintained even after the set input is turned off Once the reset input RST is turned on the output is turned off When the reset input is on the output is not turned on even if the set input is turned on When the set input and the reset input are both on and the reset input is turned off the output is turned on 18 4 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE APPENDIX This chapter describes details on FBD program processing FB execution time and the byte count for FBs Processing in One Scan While the SmartAXIS is running the SmartAXIS continue to perform operations such as input refreshing FBD program processing and error checking The execution of such a set of processing is defined as a scan The time required for this execution is referred to as one scan time The scan time varies depending on the created FBD program The current value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8023 scan time current value and the maximum value of the scan time is stored to special data register D8024 scan time maximum value FBD Program Processing In FBD programs all of the FBs
185. eady pulse frequency and then it keeps until the current pulse count reaches the preset value Then the operation transitions to the next step For After the pulse frequency keeps the frequency of the previous step and then it changes at a constant rate until it reaches the steady pulse frequency You can select one or the other in the step option settings Then the operation transitions to the next step Before After Increase Decrease 17 Next step number This setting specifies the number of the next step to be executed after the currently executed step is completed 15 32 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 15 THE PULSE Operation example ARAMP1 FB reversible control disabled timing chart ARAMP1 FB EN is specified as external input IO INI is specified as internal relay M0000 INT is not connected 51 is specified as data register D0200 Di is specified as data register D0000 and D2 is specified as internal relay M0050 10000 ARAMP FB execution input 10 Output pulse 014 Pulse output state M0052 When the FB execution input 10 changes from off to on pulses output from 014 according to the settings configured by the data registers e M50 turns on during pulse output M52 turns on or off while increasing or decreasing the pulse frequency e Pulses are output according to the frequency change time until they reach the steady puls
186. eariy bou Yea 2011 Month and Day Settings Month September 9 Day of the week End of month OFF settings Yea Month and Day Settings Month Dune 253 Day of the week End of month E Specify ON duration Preview Year 3 2013 May 2013 June 2013 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa SRB i Rib IS Em mH 5 26 27 28 29 30 S Configure the tabs as shown above and connect the YEAR FB output to Q000 DEC SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 23 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER To turn on output 0000 from 0 00 on August 12 to 0 00 on August 15 every year 2009 ON date 2000 08 12 2010 2011 2012 OFF date 2099 08 15 Yearly setting ON Monthly setting OFF B n n s r Parameter tab YEAR Yearly Timer E37 Devices P1 ON settings yearly E Monthy Year poo E Month and Day Settings Month August Ox Day of the week 2 End of month OFF settings Year 2099 E Month and Day Settings Month August 9o sH 5 Day of the week End of month E Specify ON duration 1 Preview 8 2 34 55 T 7 8 9 10 idi i2 13 4 5 6 78910 8 9 10 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 11 MMMM 15 16 17 15 16 17 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 23 24 28 29 30 31 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 29 30 i 18 25 July 2013 August 20
187. ecimal bit When configured to turn on the output on the last Saturday of March Last Reserved bit Month setting bit Reserved Week setting Day of the week setting Month setting 0011 3 March Week setting 110 6 Last Day of the week setting 110 6 Saturday The value of the data register is 1100110110 binary 822 decimal bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 9 0 9 9 0 01 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 bit SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 21 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER Timing Chart when the Execution Input Turns On during the Configured Period When the execution input turns on or off during the period between the ON settings and the OFF settings and when the execution input is turns on or off after 0 00 on the date configured by the ON settings under the condition that pulse output is enabled the timing chart is as follows aWhen pulse output is disabled When the execution input is turned on the current date is compared with the ON and OFF settings and the output turns on or off according to the result Setting details ON settings February 15 2012 OFF settings February 17 2012 Output port 0000 When the execution input is turned on before the date specified by the ON settings On February 13 2012 when the execution input is turned on the result of the current date compared with
188. ecution input is off on measuring the ON time of the the accumulated ON time is retained When the reset input turns off measuring the execution input is started and the output turns off ON time of the execution input is started again Execution ON input EN off I Reset input 9 RST OFF h Output ON OUT OFF When the accumulated ON time is equal to or greater than the preset value the output turns on Preset value 5h 05 Accumulated ON time h 0 0 When the reset input turns on the accumulated ON time is reset to 0 and the output turns off e When the selected operation mode is Keep Output When the execution input is turned When the execution input is off on measuring the ON time of the the accumulated ON time is retained When the reset input turns off measuring the execution input is started and the output state is kept ON time of the execution input is started again Execution ON input EN off Li Reset input ON RST OFF Output ON OUT OFF When the accumulated rd ON time is equal to or greater than the preset value the output turns on Preset value 5h 05 Accumulated ON time h 0 When the reset input turns on the accumulated ON time is reset to 0 and the output turns off When the reset input RST is off and the execution input EN is on the ON time of the e
189. ed in ascending order from zero The timer number can be changed to a desired number However the timer numbers already used in any other Timer FBs cannot be used When the execution input turns on the current value ON time elapsed time starts being incremented When the execution input is on the output keeps on Execiti n until the current value reaches the ON time TP1 Then the current value OFF Input EN input On off time elapsed time starts being incremented and the output is off until it reaches the OFF time TP2 While the execution input is on the on off operation of the output i e pulse output is repeated according to the operation mode When the execution input is off the output is off When the execution input is on the output is turned on and off in a cycle Output OUT Output according to the configured parameters When the execution input is off the output is off Specify the length of time that the output is on uu ON tme 988 988 The ON time value be specified as a constant or data register 2 Specify the length of time that the output is off ORF time iub The OFF time value be specified as a constant or a data register 2 Specify the pulse number or the pulse output time TP3 Pulse number 0 to 65 535 The value can be specified as a constant or a data register 2 tme When continuance is selected as the operation mode this parameter is disabled For the pulse nu
190. ed off When the comparison value falls below the ON threshold the output is turned off ON Execution input EN OFF OFF threshold OFF r Neue RUE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 p 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ON threshold ON 7 1 1 1 1 1 1 H 1 1 1 1 DATA i Output OUT i OFF o 0 m gt E73 N When the execution input is off The output is turned on while the comparison value is between ON and OFF thresholds 11 4 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 11 THE COMPARISON FB RCMP Range Comparison Compares the comparison value and the upper limit lower limit and turns the output on or off according to the comparison result Symbol EN RCMP OUT DATA UL LL Operation When the execution input EN is on the output OUT is turned on when the comparison value DATA is smaller than the lower limit LL or when the comparison value is greater than the upper limit UL The output is turned off when the comparison value is between the lower limit and the upper limit When the execution input is off the output is turned off Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify special function block The block number is
191. editing dialog box in WindLDR the control registers When the interrupt input INT is turned on the step being executed is aborted and the interrupt step is executed The current pulse count of the current step and the settings including the preset value and the steady pulse frequency are stored in the specified data registers The control status including the pulse output status output on control direction output complete is stored as the operation status in the specified internal relays Note The same pulse output port cannot be shared with more than one ARAMP FB However the ZRN Zero Return FB can be configured with the same pulse output port as the PULS Pulse Output PWM Pulse Width Modulation RAMP Ramp Pulse Output and ARAMP Advanced Ramp FBs Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Note X Note These instructions cannot be used with FT1A HAORC and FT1A B40RC 15 26 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE e 15 THE PULSE Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Number B Block number BU to 8399 The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used When the execution input is on pulses are output from the pulse output EN Execution in
192. egisters with each scan To initialize the values only one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU Shot up FB or the SOTD Shot down FB 4 INT Interrupt Input When the interrupt input turns from off to on the pulse output process for the running step is aborted and pulse output restarts with the settings for the step specified by the interrupt number 15 THE PULSE FB In the following example the interrupt input turns on while step 2 is running Pulse output processing for step 2 aborts and the operation transitions to step 12 Stepi frequency Step2 Step3 Steady pulse frequency Steady pulse frequency Step4 Steady pulse frequency Steady pulse Frequency change time Interrupt input is on 5 12 An external input 10 to 135 or internal relay to 1277 be specified as the interrupt input High Speed 10 I2 15 I6 I7 An interrupt is used to read the interrupt input The interrupt input can be read without being affected by the user program scan Normal Notes I1 I4 I10 to 135 The interrupt input is read in the END processing 0 to M1277 This is affected by the user program scan e Do not use the same input or internal relay as the interrupt input signal for the ARAMP1 and ARAMP2 FBs use high speed interrupt input set the relevant input to Normal Input under Special Input on Function Area Settings Do
193. elay counting is proceeding if the execution input turns on the current value off delay elapsed time returns to 0 When the reset input is on the output is off regardless of the on off state of the execution input Notes to T198 be used for the timer number However for the 12 1 TO to T98 can be used The on off delay timer uses 2 timers Starting from the timer specified by the timer number 2 consecutive timers used The timer specified with the timer number 0 is allocated for the on delay time T1 The timer specified with the timer number 1 is allocated for the off delay time T2 e The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored FB TIMCU 1 sec TIMCU 100 ms TIMCU 10 ms TIMCU 1ms The range of Preset value 0 to 65535 seconds 0 to 6553 5 seconds 0 to 655 35 seconds 0 to 65 535 seconds 8 12 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 Nipec 8 THE TIMER e The timer numbers T already used in any other timer FBs cannot be used e If the preset values for the on off delay timer are changed during on delay counting the timer operates as follows 1 If the changed on delay time is larger than the current value counting continues until the current value reach
194. ements of 1 ms Reversible control enable Dual pulse output Control direction D0003 Preset value D0004 D0005 1000000 1to 100 000 000 Current value D0006 D0007 1to 100 000 000 Error status 00008 Function Device address Setting value Details Operation Mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency D0000 3000 30 kHz Initial pulse frequency D0001 1000 10 kHz Frequency change time D0002 2000 2 000 ms Reversible control enable Dual pulse output mode Control direction D0003 Preset value 15 20 D0004 00005 1000000 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 Preset value 1 000 000 15 THE PULSE ZRN Zero Return The ZRN FB outputs pulses with the different pulse frequency corresponding to the on off state of a deceleration signal Symbol EN ZRN1 OUT EN ZRN2 OUT INI INI DE DE Operation When the execution input EN is on and the deceleration signal DE is off pulses of the initial pulse frequency are output from the pulse output port until the proximity signal turns on When the deceleration signal turns on pulses of the specified creep pulse frequency are output until the deceleration signal turns off After that when the deceleration signal turns off pulse output stops When the execution input is off pulse output stops When the initialization input INI is on the initial values configured in the Settings tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the
195. ent All persons using these components must be willing to accept responsibility for choosing the correct component to suit their application and for choosing an application appropriate for the component individually or in combination with other equipment All diagrams and examples in this manual are for illustrative purposes only In no way does including these diagrams and examples in this manual constitute a guarantee as to their suitability for any specific application To test and approve all programs prior to installation is the responsibility of the end user Preface 2 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 ZI DEC RELATED MANUALS The following manuals related to the SmartAXIS are available Refer to them in conjunction with this manual Type No Manual Name Description Describes product specifications installation and wiring instructions instructions for FTOY B1378 SmartAXIS Pro Lite basic programming operations and special functions device and instruction lists User s Manual communication functions and troubleshooting procedures for the SmartAXIS Pro Lite series SmartAXIS Describes basic operations for ladder programming instructions for editing and FT9Y B1382 monitoring ladders on the SmartAXIS available devices and instruction lists and Lad Pro ing Manual edger Pisgramiming Manua details of each instruction SmartAXIS FT9Y B1386 FBD Programming Manual this manual Describes basic operations for func
196. eo gt o When the reset input i turns on the output immediately turns off When the reset input is on the timer does not start even if the execution input turns on Preset value Preset value When the execution input turns off the output turns off even if the preset value is not elapsed 2 When the operation mode is time precedence Execution input ON TRG oF o ON P 3 3 ase Reset input OFF i i i ad RST l i EE Output 31 i i i i i i OUT When the reset input 1 i REN 1 turns on the output i 1 7 Preset value Preset value immediately turns off Preset value When the execution When the reset input is on the timer input turns on the timer TS does not start even if the execution starts Even if the execution input turns input turns on off the output keeps on for the duration of the preset value When the execution input TRG turns on while the reset input RST is off the current value returns to 0 the output turns on and the current value starts being incremented When the current value reaches the preset value TP the output OUT turns off The FB operation depends on the operation mode when the execution input turns off while the current value is being incremented 1 When the operation mode is input precedence When the execution input turns off the output also turns off 2 When th
197. ero and the output Input is turned off When the reset input is off the CNT FB can count the input pulses When unconnected the reset input is handled as off UP Up clock input On off The current value is incremented by one at a rising edge in the up clock input The output is turned on when the current value is equal to or greater than Output OUT Output the preset value The output is turned off when the current value is smaller than the preset value Number Counter number to C199 W word 0 to 65 535 The value at which the output is turned on CP Preset value D double word 0 to 4 294 967 295 The value can be specified as a constant or a data register Parameters W word 0 to 65 535 If the data type is W the counter can count in the range of 0 to 65 535 OP Data type D double word If the data type is D the counter can count in the range of 0 to to 4 294 967 295 4 294 967 295 1 CO to C99 for the 12 I O type 2 The valid range differs according to the data type specified by OP When the data type is W word Specify a constant value in the range of 0 to 65 535 To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register in which the preset value is stored and store a constant value in the data register in the range of 0 to 65 535 When the data type is D double word Specify a constant value in the range of 0 to 4 294 967 295 To indirectl
198. ers already used in any other FBs cannot be used When the gate input is on the high speed counter performs the counting GT Gate input On off operation When the gate input is off the high speed counter does not perform the counting operation Number B Block number to B999 1 Input When the reset input is on the reset value is stored in the current value RST Reset input On off HD When unconnected the input is handled as off When the clear input is on the external comparison output is turned off CLR Clear input On off ar impu When unconnected the input is handled as off The output operates according to the comparison action configured in the High speed Counter Settings dialog box of WindLDR Output OUT Output 1 When the comparison output m disabled the Output is always off 2 When the comparison output is enabled the output is turned on for 1 scan when the current value reaches to the preset value When the current value is not equal to the preset value the output is off High speed Specifies the high speed counter group 3 Parameters OP aues 1to6 ipe sd counter group Set this value as a constant 1 BO to B199 for the 12 I O type 2 For details on the external comparison output see the following manuals e Chapter 5 Special Functions High speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e Chapter 3 Projects 4 Special Functions 4 7 High s
199. ery scan 3 10 D8027 Port 2 Slave Number Every scan 3 11 D8028 Port 3 Slave Number Every scan 3 11 D8029 System Software Version Power up 3 11 D8030 Communication Adapter Information Power up 3 11 D8031 Optional Cartridge Information Power up 3 11 D8032 D8038 Reserved D8039 SD Memory Card Capacity Megabytes Every 1 sec 3 11 D8040 Analog Input Value AIO Every scan 3 11 D8041 Analog Input Value AI1 Every scan 3 11 D8042 Analog Input Value AI2 Every scan 3 11 D8043 Analog Input Value AI3 Every scan 3 11 D8044 Analog Input Value AI4 Every scan 3 11 D8045 Analog Input Value AI5 Every scan 3 11 D8046 Analog Input Value AI6 Every scan 3 11 D8047 Analog Input Value AI7 Every scan 3 11 D8048 D8049 Reserved D8050 High Word Current Value Frequenc D8051 Lon Word Measurement 2 Every sean an D8052 High speed High Word D8053 Counter Lon Word Preset Value 3 11 Group 1 10 D8054 High Word Reset Value 3 11 D8055 Low Word IDEC SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 3 7 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Device Address Description Updated See Page D8056 High Word 9 Current Value Frequency Every sca 3 11 D8057 Low Word Measurement Value I2 D8058 High speed High Word pe059 Counter Low Word Preset Value 3 11 Group 2 12 OW ILOT D8060 High Word Reset V
200. es comparison value 1 and comparison value 2 and turns the output on or off according to the comparison result Symbol EN CMP OUT DAT1 DAT2 Operation When the execution input EN is on comparison value 1 DAT1 and comparison value 2 DAT2 are compared according to the specified operator and the comparison result is output When the execution input is off the output is turned off Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned ascending order from zero The block number can Numbe B Block numb BO to B999 4 M d be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used EN Execution On off When the execution input is on comparison values 1 and 2 are compared input according to the specified operator DATI Comparison The comparison values Input value 1 This value can be specified as an analog input a data register a timer 2 current value preset value a counter current value preset value or a Comparison 3 DAT2 lue 2 constant vang Unconnected inputs are handled as 0 When the execution input is on if the comparison result of comparison values 1 and 2 is true the output is turned on If the comparison result of Output OUT Output P comparison values 1 and 2 is false the output is
201. es the changed on delay time 2 If the changed on delay time is less than or equal to the current value the output immediately turns on 3 The changed off delay time is immediately reflected in timer operation If the preset values for the on off delay timer are changed during off delay counting the timer operates as follows 1 If the changed off delay time is larger than the current value counting continues until the current value reaches the changed off delay time 2 If the changed off delay time is less than or equal to the current value the output immediately turns off 3 The changed on delay time is immediately reflected in timer operation e The preset values can be changed by external devices such as operator interfaces WindLDR and LCD and buttons on the SmartAXIS Touch The changed preset values are stored in the RAM and the changes are not reflected to the user program saved in the ROM When the SmartAXIS is turned off the changed preset values are reset to the original values stored in the ROM e For details on how to store the changed preset value to the user program the ROM see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer on page 8 1 e Since the timer has advance error or behind error that error may cause a problem depending on the system For details see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer Timer Accuracy on page 8 3 DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386
202. et input is on 2 Set input precedence The output is set with a rising The output is set when edge in the execution input the set input is on ON Execution input TRG OFF l ON Set input SET OFF Reset input RST OFF Output OUT The output is reset with another The output is reset when The set input is executed with a higher rising edge in the execution input the reset input is on precedence than the reset input When the set input SET and the reset input RST are off the on off state of the output is inverted at every rising edge in the execution input EN The output is also set reset by the set input reset input according to the operation mode 1 Reset input precedence Set input Reset input Output Description 0 0 The output does not change 0 1 0 output is reset 1 0 1 The output is set 1 1 0 The output is reset the reset input is executed with a higher precedence than the set input 2 Set input precedence Set input Reset input Output Description 0 0 The output does not change 0 1 0 The output is reset 1 0 1 The output is set 1 1 1 The output is set the set input is executed with a higher precedence than the reset input 12 2 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 NipDEC 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER The week programmer function blocks turn the output on or off on a specified dates WEEK Weekly Ti
203. float which means the floating point type can be specified as the data type for FBs that use floating point For FBs that use floating point two consecutive data registers starting from the specified data register are used as a pair in the same manner as the integer types D double word and L long The SmartAXIS series floating point type data format conforms to the IEEE US Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers standard for the single precision storage format as explained next Single precision floating point values in IEEE 754 32 bits Single precision floating point values in IEEE 754 are expressed with a total of 32 bits 2 words using 1 bit for the sign s 8 bits for the exponent e and 23 bits for the significand f The sign bit indicates the sign of the expressed value positive or negative The exponent is an 8 bit signed integer with a value from 126 to 127 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 31 30 233 22 0 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T S e exponent bit 30 to 23 f significand bit 22 to 0 J 2 Y X T Value from 126 to 127 Represents 1 xxx after the decimal Sign bit 0 positive 1 negative Example lt f 0 01111101 10000000000000000000000 X zr 1 5 2 table below shows the correspondence between values in three fields of s e and f and the value expressed as a single precision floating point value When a value other than a normal number or 0 is input to a FB
204. g off the input 15 34 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 THE PULSE ARAMP1 FB reversible control enabled dual pulse output mode timing chart ARAMP1 FB EN is specified as external input IO INI is specified as internal relay M0000 INT is not connected S1 is specified as data register D0200 D1 is specified as data register D0000 and D2 is specified as internal relay M0050 on the 40 1 O type 10000 ARAMP1 FB execution input Forward pulse CW Q14 Reverse pulse CCW Q15 10 Control direction 1 0 Forward 11 Reverse Pulse output ON M0050 Pulse output complete 0051 Pulse output status M0052 When the ARAMP1 FB execution input IO changes from off to on pulses are output from Q14 according to the settings configured by the data registers The reversible control signal is output from Q14 or Q15 When pulse output starts M50 turns on M52 turns on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing The pulses increase according to the frequency change time until they reach the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency When the configured number of pulses are output the pulses stop In this situation M50 turns off and M51 turns on If the ARAMP1 FB execution input turns off during pulse output pulse output is stopped If this input turns on again the operation starts from the beginning Even if the contents of the data registers are changed dur
205. ge Comparison FBs The CMP FB in the above FBD program compares analog input AI1 with AI2 and outputs the result when input I1 is on Note e The comparison FBs CMP STTG RCMP are capable of handling data of data type W word I integer D double word and L long but output from analog input FBs can only be connected when the comparison FB data type is I integer e When handling analog input values as FB input use the analog input AI FB Analog input values 0 to 1000 can be linearly converted the range of 32768 to 32767 using the AI FB For details on the AI FB see The input FB on page 5 1 e The analog values before the linear conversion are stored in special data registers D8040 to 08047 D8149 to D8156 D8158 to D8165 D8167 to D8174 For details see Device Addresses on page 3 1 4 12 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 ZIDEC input output connectors and parameters This section describes FB input output connectors and parameters The function of the connectors and parameters can be 4 FB REFERENCE identified by the symbols The list of symbols their descriptions and data formats are shown next Input connector Symbol Description Input format IN Input ON OFF EN TRG Execution input ON OFF SET Set input ON OFF RST Reset input ON OFF PRST Preset input ON OFF UP Up clock input ON OFF CLK
206. ges e If Acknowledgement 11 is enabled for the MSG FB with the highest priority even after the input changes from on to off the same message is kept displayed The message for the MSG FB with the next highest priority is displayed when the SmartAXIS Pro module OK button is pressed Note When you press the up or amp down button on the SmartAXIS Pro the messages are switched between the MSG FBs that inputs that are on Messages are also switched when the acknowledgement for the MSG FB is enabled Motor 5 STOP AT Example Message output 10 12 in Priority 30 ACTION Motor 2 3000 Example Message output hours in Priority 10 MAINTENANCE Running 2012 0CT 01 MON Date and current time 09 00 12 11 Acknowledgment When acknowledgement is enabled the message is kept displayed even after the input to the MSG FB is turned off The message is closed when OK button on the SmartAXIS Pro is pressed and then the message for the MSG FB with the next highest priority is displayed out of all the MSG FB with inputs that are on at that time If the input to the MSG FB is on the message is not closed even when the OK button is pressed 14 4 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 m IDEC Insert Word Device The value of the specified word device can be displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD Insert Word Device IN 1 Device
207. gram in ROM use one of the following methods Store the preset values to the user program in the ROM using WindLDR SmartAXIS Pro Lite only Select Online Monitor Start Monitor Select Online PLC Status to open the PLC Status dialog box and click the Confirm button under Timer counter preset value change state Once the changed preset values are confirmed the preset values cannot be changed back to its original values even if you click the Cancel button Store the preset values to the user program in the ROM with button operations on the SmartAXIS For operations on the SmartAXIS Pro see Chapter 6 HMI Function in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual For operations on the SmartAXIS Touch see the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 8 2 SMARTAXTS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 8 THE TIMER e Since the timer has an advance error which length is same as the specified time unit that error may cause a problem depending on the system Use a time unit that is as small as possible For example when creating a 1 sec timer if the timer consists of TIMU 1 sec time unit 1 sec and the preset value is 1 it may immediately stop without 1 second of on delay time after it is started due to the advance error In this situation the advance error can be reduced to within 1 ms by the use of TIMU 1 ms time unit 1 ms with the preset value of 1000 which makes an even more accurate 1 sec ti
208. gs July 04 2012 Output port 0000 When the execution input turns on before the date specified by the ON settings Since the execution input is on at 0 00 on July 02 2012 the output turns on for one scan Since the execution input is on at 0 00 on July 04 2012 the output turns on for one scan July 2012 Current date nn ist 2nd 3rd 4th 5th ON i Execution input 0000 OFF ON Output port Q000 OFF 1 tab 2 tab ON setting ON setting 13 22 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB When the execution input turns on on the date specified by the ON settings When the execution input turns on at 0 00 on July 02 2012 the output turns on for one scan When the execution input turns on after 0 00 on July 04 2012 the output turns on for one scan ne July 2012 Current date Bn 1st 2nd 3rd UT Execution input M0000 OFF ON Output port Q000 OFF aag 4 4 1 tab P 2 tab ON setting ON setting Operation Example a To configure the dates as constant settings To turn on Q000 from 0 00 on September 1 2011 to 0 00 on June 25 2013 ON date 2011 09 01 2011 2012 2013 2014 OFF date 2013 06 25 Yearly setting OFF Monthly setting OFF YEAR Yearly Timer E377 Devices P1 ON settings lg v
209. gt R2 The on off state of the data input is stored in the LSB least significant bit of the shift registers e When the direction input is on the shift registers are shifted in descending order R127 gt R126 gt R125 The on off state of the data input is stored in the MSB most significant bit of the shift registers When the reset input is on the shift registers are set to 0 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The block number can Numbe B Block num BO to B999 S be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used Execution TRG Miam il On off With a rising edge in the execution input the shift operation is performed When the reset input is on the shift registers are set to 0 The reset input is RST Reset input On off executed with a higher precedence than the execution input Unconnected inputs are handled as OFF With a rising edge in the execution input the on off state of the data input is input DI Data input On off stored n the LSB least significant bit or MSB most significant bit of the shift registers Unconnected inputs are handled as OFF When the direction input is off the bits are shifted in ascending order
210. hat can be modified 60000 40000 Move the cursor to the device you wish to edit using the up down left right buttons and press the o OK button to change the device in the editable state Press the right button to move the cursor to the fourth digit and then use the up button to modify the target value to 65000 DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 17 14 THE INTERFACE FB Scrolling text example Character Set European scroll speed 500 ms When a text with effect is set to scroll the text is displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD as follows When scrolling a text longer than the specified areaon When scrolling a text shorter than or equal to the the LCD specified area on the LCD Text IDEC Corporation SmartAXIS Text IDEC Corp SmartAXIS 500 msec XI 5 IDEO 14 18 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 14 THE INTERFACE FB Character Set European Scroll speed 500 ms Scroll unit 1 dot When text with effect is set to
211. hrough IN4 Parameters 1 to B199 for the 12 1 type 2 The result of logical AND on the on off states of the inputs IN1 through IN4 is shown below IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT 1 oO Oo IDEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 7 1 7 THE LOGICAL OPERATION FB NAND Negative Logical AND Calculates the negative logical AND on the input signals and outputs the result Symbol IN1 O OUT IN2 IN3 IN4 Operation The NAND FB calculates the negative logical AND on a maximum of four input signals ON OFF and outputs the result Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Numb B Block b BO to B999 1 uis The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used IN1 On off IN2 On off Any function block having digital output on off can be connected to each Input input Unconnected in
212. ify the period for keeping the output on after it turns on Spe ON tion 1to 30 pecity durati If this setting is enabled other OFF settings are disabled Specify in the range of 1 day to 30 days 3 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 15 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB Notes e When the date is duplicated in the settings on other tabs the settings on the tab with the larger tab number are valid e For example if the ON date is the 8th of every month and the OFF date is the 16th of every month on the P 1 tab and the ON date is the 16th of every month and the OFF date is the 22nd of every month on the P 2 tab the 16th of every month setting is duplicated on the 2 tabs and the ON settings for the P 2 tab are valid In this situation the output is on from the 8th to the 22nd of every month Year 2012 Month 9 10 ON date OFF date ON 8thof 16th of every 9 Settings on the P 1 tab month OFF ON Settings on the P 2 tab OFF ON Output OFF e If the ON date is the 16th of every month and the OFF date is the 22nd of every month on the P 1 tab and the ON date is the 8th of every month and the OFF date is the 16th of every month on the P 2 tab the 16th of every month setting is duplicated on the 2 tabs and the ON settings for the P 1 tab are disabled In this situation the output is on from the 8th to the 16th of every month uPreview YEAR Yearly Timer ea Devi
213. ile the execution input is on the current value is decremented When the current value reaches 0 the counting stops and the output OUT turns on After the counting stops the current value remains at 0 and output keeps on until the execution input turns off When the execution input is off the current value returns to the preset value and the output is off Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify the Timer function block The timer number is automaticall igned in ascending order from zero N mber T Timer number TO to 1199 1 i r nu r is automatically assig d in ascending order from zi E The timer number can be changed to a desired number However the timer numbers already used in any other Timer FBs cannot be used Execution When the execution input turns on counting starts While the execution Input TRG insi On off input is on the current value is decremented until it reaches 0 When the execution input is off the current value returns to the preset value When the current value is greater than 0 the output is off Output OUT Output P When the current value is 0 the output is on Specify the time interval on delay time from when the execution input turns TP Preset value 0 to 65 535 on to when the output turns on Parameters The value can be specified using a constant or a data register 2 1 sec 1
214. ile the execution input is on the on off operation of the output is repeated 2 When the operation mode is pulse count restriction When the execution input is on the on off operation of the output is repeated for the specified number of pulses TP3 3 When the operation mode is output time restriction When the execution input is on the on off operation of the output is repeated for the specified time TP3 When the execution input is off the output is off FIDEC SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 17 8 THE TIMER Notes TO to T197 be used for the timer number However for the 12 1 type TO to T97 can be used The dual timer uses 3 timers Starting from the timer specified by the timer number 3 consecutive timers are used The timer specified with the timer number 0 is allocated for the ON time T1 The timer specified with the timer number 1 is allocated for the OFF time T2 The timer specified with the timer number 2 is allocated for the pulse count time 3 The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored FB DTIM 1 sec DTIM 100 ms DTIM 10 ms DTIM 1ms The range of Preset value 0 to 65535 seconds 0 to 6553 5 seconds 0 to 655 35 seconds 0 to 65 535 seconds 8 18 The ti
215. in D8133 and M8154 turns off For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 8155 In operation Output This special internal relay is used for the data register ROM backup When M8155 turns on at the end of scan the values in the corresponding ROM are read and stored in the data registers specified by D8184 start address to read and D8185 number of registers to read After reading values the execution status is stored 08133 and 8155 turns off For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 3 5 13 DEVICE ADDRESSES M8160 M8163 Button Input Status When the ESC and direction buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro are simultaneously pressed the corresponding special internal relays M8160 through M8163 turn on When no buttons are pressed M8160 through M8163 turn off M8166 M8177 Special Internal Relays for High speed Counter Special internal relays used for the high speed counter For details on the high speed counter see the following manuals e Chapter 5 Special Functions High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e Chapter 3 Project 4 Special Functions 4 7 High Speed Counter in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 3 6 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DEC Special Data Registers 3 DEVICE ADDR
216. inearly until it reaches the steady pulse frequency It remains constant at this frequency for some time and then the pulse frequency is decreased linearly until the pulse count reaches the specified preset value and pulse output is stopped When the initialization input INI is on the initial values configured in the Settings tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers Steady pulse frequency Initial pulse frequency The same frequency change rate and the same frequency change time apply to the accelerating and decelerating periods of the trapezoidal frequency change pattern Frequency change time area Preset value Note The same pulse output port cannot be shared with more than one RAMP FB However the ZRN Zero Return FB can be configured with the same pulse output port as the PULS Pulse Output PWM Pulse Width Modulation RAMP Ramp Pulse Output and ARAMP Advanced Ramp FBs Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Note X Note These instructions cannot be used with FT1A HAORC and FT1A B40RC Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Number B Block number B0 The block number be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other
217. ing pulse output the change is not reflected in the pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the ARAMP1 FB is started You cannot change between forward and reverse until the pulse output pulse frequency is set to its minimum The changes from the initialization input M00 are not reflected while the ARAMP1 FB execution input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input 00 on after turning off the input DEC SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 35 15 THE PULSE Sample program This section describes an example program that outputs pulses as shown below with the frequency change function reversible control disabled using the following settings The pulses are output from Q14 10 kHz Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 1 kHz Preset value 4 000 Preset value 4 000 Preset value 4 000 100 2 1 Hz Frequency change time Frequency change time Frequency change time 2 000 msec 2 000 msec 4 000 msec 10000 l e Initialize the data registers when SmartAXIS starts B0000 090000 e When the 1 FB execution input 10 turns on pulse Initialize Pulse output starts M8120 Basic settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table me Devices Settings
218. integer is specified as the data type For the Touch transistor output type an analog input FB can be specified only when W word or I integer is specified as the data type Timing Chart 1 When ON threshold 2 OFF threshold When the execution input EN is on the comparison value DATA is compared with the ON threshold ON and the OFF threshold and the output OUT is turned on or off e When comparison value gt ON threshold the output is turned on e When comparison value lt OFF threshold the output is turned off When the execution input is off the output is turned off When the comparison value falls below the OFF threshold the output is turned off ON Execution input EN i OFF i ON threshold ON OFF threshold OFF Comparison value DATA ON Output OUT OFF gt The output is on from when the comparison value exceeds the ON threshold until it falls below the OFF threshold When the execution input is off the output is turned off 2 When ON threshold OFF threshold When the execution input EN is on the comparison value DATA is compared with the ON threshold ON and the OFF threshold and the output OUT is turned on or off e When OFF threshold gt comparison value gt ON threshold the output is turned on e When comparison value gt OFF threshold or ON threshold gt comparison value the output is turned off When the execution input is off the output is turn
219. ion OUT OUT EN PULS2 INI EN PULS4 INI OUT OUT When the execution input EN is on pulses are output from the pulse output port n according to the control register S1 settings The pulse control information output on output complete error is stored in the specified internal relays as the operation status When the initialization input INI is on the initial values configured in the Settings tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers Note The same pulse output port cannot be shared with more than one PULS FB However the ZRN Zero Return FB can be configured with the same pulse output port as the PULS Pulse Output PWM Pulse Width Modulation RAMP Ramp Pulse Output and ARAMP Advanced Ramp FBs Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Note X Note These instructions cannot be used with FT1A HAORC and FT1A B40RC Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Number Bios number The block number be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used When the execution input turns on the pulse output starts from the pulse EN Execution input On off output port Input When the execution input turns off the pulse output stops INI Initial
220. ion status xy 1 Special data registers cannot be used 2 Internal relays can be used However the first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Special internal relays cannot be used Settings a Device tab PWM Pulse Width Modulation Devices Settings a PWM 1 00014 51 Control Register 2 Device Address Comment INI Initialization Input D1 OperationStatus OK Cancel 1 PWM FB selection Select the PWM FB from PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 or PWM4 The pulse output pulse duty cycle ON ratio configurable operation mode and enabling disabling pulse counting differ depending on PWM FB pulse output port number PULS FB Pulse output Configurable operation mode Enable disable pulse counting PULS1 014 Pulse countin n be bled or disabled 1 to 100 1 increments Deen 9e enabled or eisa PULS2 Q15 Pulse counting range 1 to 100 000 000 PULS3 Q16 1 to 100 1 to 50 Hz is 1 increments 51 to 1 000 2 is pulse frequency 50 Disable pulse counting PULS4 Q17 increments 2 S1 Control Register S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with the PWM1 PWM2 PWM3 and PWM4 FBs Starting from the specified data register 7 consecutive data registers are used The range of available data registers is DO to D993 and D1000 to D1993 Storage destination Starting number 0 Function Output pulse frequen
221. ionStatus Tag Name D0000 00 f 0100 Device Address D0000 0000 M0100 Comment RAMP Ramp Pulse Output EN Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Operation Mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency D0000 600 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Initial pulse frequency D0001 30 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0002 2000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Reversible control enable Disabled Control direction D0003 Preset value 00004 00005 48000 1 to 100 000 000 Current value 00006 00007 1 to 100 000 000 Error status 00008 Cancel Function Device address Setting value Details Operation Mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Steady pulse frequency 0000 600 6000 2 Initial pulse frequency D0001 30 300 Hz Frequency change time D0002 2000 2 000 ms Reversible control enable Disable Control direction D0003 Preset value D0004 D0005 48000 Preset value 48 000 15 18 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 THE PULSE output 100 000 pulses with the frequency change function reversible control by single pulse output from 0141 When the RAMP FB execution input 10 turns from off to on pulse output starts When is off the control direction output 015 turns off forward When I1 is on the control direction output 015 turns on reverse 10000 Initialize Pulse M8120 00000
222. ister S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with the RAMP1 and RAMP2 FBs Starting from the specified data register 9 consecutive data registers are used The range of available data registers is 00 to 0991 and D1000 to D1991 Storage destination Function Setting details Reference Starting Steady pulse Operation mode 0 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments number 0 frequency Operation mode 1 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments 6 Steady pulse frequency on page 15 13 Starting Initial pulse Operation mode 0 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments T number 1 frequency Operation mode 1 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments 7 Initial pulse frequency on page 15 14 Starting Frequency en number 2 change time 10 to 10 000 ms 8 Frequency change time on page 15 14 Starting Control 0 Forward action number 3 direction is Reverse 10 Control direction on page 15 14 Starting Preset value number 4 upper upp 1 to 100 000 000 pulses 11 Preset value on page 15 14 Starting Preset value number 5 lower word Starting Current value 5 number 6 upper word upp 1 to 100 000 000 pulses 12 Current value on page 15 14 Starting Current value number 7 lower word 2 Starting 1 number 8 Error status 0to9 13 Error status on page 15 15 using the data register 2 Stores the on off state of the control direction input This data register is read only
223. itten to the data registers with each scan To initialize the values only one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU Shot up FB or the SOTD Shot down FB 2 An external input IO to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified 3 Specify the start address of data register according to the number of steps to ensure that the last address doesn t over D0999 4 The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP B D AI Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X Initialization input X X X DIR Interrupt input X X S1 Control register x1 Di Monitor register x D2 Operation status x 1 Special data registers cannot be used 2 Special internal relays cannot be used The first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 27 IDEC 15 THE PULSE Settings Device tab ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table E35 Devices Settings Ramp Table 2 3 4 5 6 E 51 Control Register INI Initialization Input INT Interrupt Input D1 Monitor Register 02 Operation Status Tag Name e fe Device Address Comment Cancel 1 ARAMP FB selection Selects the ARAMP FB to use from ARAMP1 or 2 The reversible c
224. ity When the display conditions for multiple MSG FBs are satisfied the messages are displayed according to the priority set for the MSG FB For MSG FB priority see 10 Priority on page 14 4 Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch 4 SmartAXIS Pro only The MSG FB cannot be used on Lite 1 DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 1 14 THE INTERFACE FB Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each special FB The block number is Number B Block number BO to B999 automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used Input EN On off When the exec tiori input is on a message is displayed on SmartAXIS input Pro LCD according to the content configured in the MSG FB dialog box Output OUT Output 7 When the execution input is on the output turns on When the execution input is off the output turns off The priority of the MSG FB When the execution inputs of two or more MSG FBs are on the message of the MSG FB with the highest priority is displayed Parameters PRI Priority 0 to 49 on the LCD out of all the MSG FB with execution inputs that are on 0 is the highest priority and 49 is the lowest priority Specify the priority with a constant value to B199 for the
225. ization On off When the initialization input is on the initial values configured in the Settings input tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers Output OUT Output When the pulse output has completed the output turns and keeps Pulse output Specify the pulse output port number for the PULS FB The pulse output port Port number PULSI to PULSA differs with PULS1 through PULSA DO to D993 Specify the starting number of the data registers to use with the PULS FB Parameters S1 Control register D1000 to D1993 2 from the specified data register 7 consecutive data registers Specify the starting number of the internal relays to use with the PULS FB D1 Operation status MO to M1270 Starting from the specified internal relay 3 consecutive internal relays are used 1 The bit device such as an external input 10 to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan To initialize the values only one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU Shot up FB or the SOTD Shot down FB SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 1 15 THE PULSE Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T B D Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X X Initializatio
226. k The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Numbe B Block numbe to B999 1 T enamel The block number be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used IN1 On off Any function block having digital output on off can be connected to each Input input Unconnected inputs are handled as OFF However all inputs cannot be IN2 On off unconnected Output OUT Output Outputs the result of exclusive logical OR on IN1 through IN2 2 Parameters 1 to B199 for the 12 1 type 2 The result of exclusive logical OR on the on off states of the inputs IN1 through IN2 is shown below IN1 IN2 OUT o IDEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 7 5 7 THE LOGICAL OPERATION FB XNOR Negative Exclusive Logical OR Calculates the negative exclusive logical OR on the input signals and outputs the result Symbol IN1 OUT IN2 Operation The XNOR FB calculates the negative exclusive logical OR on a maximum of two input signals ON OFF and outputs the result Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Numb B Block b to B999 1 Cic
227. k and the time by specifying data registers on page 13 6 Configuring the day of the week and the time as constant settings The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings are uniquely determined The day of the week and the time for the ON OFF settings cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running Device tab WEEK Weekly Timer E377 5 4 Pulse Output S2 The number of parameter tabs 1 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday 1 Data register settings Select constant setting or indirect designation with data registers for the WEEK FB day of the week and time configuration To configure the day of the week and the time as constant settings clear this check box Cleared check box The day of the week and time are configured permanently The day of the week and the time are configured on the parameter tabs The day of the week and the time cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For the settings see Parameter tab on page 13 4 Note When this check box is selected the settings for the day of the week and the time are indirectly specified with data registers Configure the day of the week and the time by using data registers In this case the day of the week and the time can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For indirect designation with data registers see Configuring the days of the week and the time by specifying data registers o
228. l registe i 1000 to 01997 Starting from the specified data register 3 consecutive data registers are used Specify the starting number of the internal relays to use with the ZRN FB D1 Operation status to M1270 starting number af the internal relays toes wi Starting from the specified internal relay 2 consecutive internal relays are used 1 The bit device such as an external input 10 to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan To initialize the values only one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU Shot up FB or the SOTD Shot down FB 2 An external input 10 to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP B D AI Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X X Initialization input X X X x DIR Proximity signal input X X 51 Control register x Di Operation status x 1 Special data registers cannot be used 2 Internal relays can be used However the first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Special internal relays cannot be used IDE SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 21 15 THE PULSE Settings a Device tab ZRN Zero Return 9 Devices Settings ZRN 1
229. lay type from the following table for each device for when the device values are output to the CSV file Display type Range Maximum characters DEC W 0 to 65 535 5 DEC I 32 768 to 32 767 DEC D 0 to 4 294 967 295 10 DEC L 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 11 DEC F 3 402823E 38 to 3 402823E 38 13 HEX W 0000 to FFFF 4 HEX D 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 8 BIN B 1 7 The data as many consecutive devices as the specified repeat starting from the specified device address are output to the SD memory card For example when the display type of D10 is DEC W and the repeat is set to 8 the data is output to SD memory card as follows Triggered at 2011 9 7 15 40 30 lt Header row 1 Scan D0010 D0011 D0012 D0013 00014 D0015 D0016 D0017 lt Header row 2 Old 1 9 17 25 33 41 49 57 lt Data 7 scans before 2 10 18 26 34 42 50 58 lt Data 6 scans before 3 11 19 27 35 43 51 59 lt Data 5 scans before 4 12 20 28 36 44 52 60 lt Data 4 scans before 5 13 21 29 37 45 53 61 lt Data 3 scans before 6 14 22 30 38 46 54 62 lt Data 2 scans before 7 15 23 31 39 47 55 63 lt Data 1 scan before New 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 Latest data 8 Trace data size The amount of memory that the TRACE FB uses for the current trace settings is shown The amount of memory used increases when a device to trace the data is added
230. le for the same date does not exist in the folder designated by S1 a new CSV file is created and the header and the log data 1 are output as shown in above output format example If the DLOG FB is executed again on the same date the log data 2 is appended to the CSV file Similarly if the DLOG FB is executed again on the same date log data 3 is appended to the CSV file When the date changes and the DLOG FB is executed a new CSV file with a new file name is created and the header and the log data is output File format configuration procedure 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configuration Cartridges 2 Under Data Log and Trace CSV File Format configure the separating character and the decimal symbol The separating characters and the decimal symbols that are contained in the CSV file vary by country and region You can select the symbols to use from the following 1 Separating character comma or semicolon 2 Decimal symbol period or comma 3 Click the OK button to close the dialog box Function Area Settings ea Run Stop Control t Configure the cartridges Memory Backup Input Configuration Memory Cartridge Communication Ports Enable Memory Cartridge Download en OE RETE ee EN Device Setti Separating Character Comma ix 0 Program Protection Decimal Symbol Period 2 Self Diagnostic Calendar amp Clock Network Settings Connection Settings
231. m off in ij sec Cartridges a oor caren Enable ladder program editing monitoring on FTIA Device Settings Program Protection Message Settings Self Diagnostic Character Set 1 European 150 8859 1 Latin 1 Calendar amp Clock Scroll Unit 2 one character Network Settings Scroll Speed 3 500 ms esas Blink Speed 4 soo ms 1 Character Set The character set used for the messages can be configured from the following Selection Character Set Languages usable in the MSG FB European ISO 8859 1 Latin 1 Italian English Dutch Spanish German French Japanese Shift JIS Japanese Chinese GB2312 Chinese simplified Cyrillic ANSI 1251 Russian 2 Scroll Unit The unit to scroll the texts can be configured 1 character Scrolls the text in 1 character units 1 dot Scrolls the text in 1 dot units 3 Scroll Speed The speed to scroll the texts can be configured The setting range is 500 to 1000 ms 4 Blinking Speed The speed to blink the texts can be configured The setting range is 500 to 1000 ms Note The MSG FB character set can be configured irrespective of the SmartAXIS Pro system menu language DE SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 9 14 THE INTERFACE FB MSG FB Configuration Example Display the room temperature when M0000 is on and the outdoor temperature when M0000 is off The room temperature outdoor temperature
232. martAXIS Pro Lite 48 I O type 4 SmartAXIS Touch D8003 Memory Cartridge Information When an optional memory cartridge is installed on the SmartAXIS cartridge connector information about the user program stored on the memory cartridge is stored to D8003 0 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 12 I O type 1 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 24 I O type 2 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 40 I O type 3 SmartAXIS Pro Lite 48 I O type 255 The memory cartridge does not store any user program D8005 General Error Code SmartAXIS general error information is stored to D8005 When a general error occurs the bit corresponding to the error occurred turns on The general error and user program execution error can be cleared by writing 1 to the most significant bit of D8005 using a user program For details on general error codes see the following manuals e Chapter 14 Troubleshooting General Error Codes in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Chapter 30 Troubleshooting 2 Error Information 2 1 General Error Codes in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual D8006 User Program Execution Error Code SmartAXIS user program execution error information is stored to D8006 When a user program execution error occurs the error code corresponding to the error occurred is stored to D8006 For details on user program execution error codes see the following manuals e Chapter 14 Troubleshooting User Program Execution Error in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e Chapter 30 Troublesho
233. mber restriction when the execution input is on the Parameters specified number of pulses are output and then the output turns off Pulse number un Nn e the output time restriction when the execution input is on pulses are Operation restriction output until the elapsed time reaches the specified time When the elapsed OP output time mode I time reaches the specified time the output turns off restriction For continuance pulses are continuously output while the execution input is on When the execution input turns off the output turns off the default operation mode is continuance continuance 1 sec 100 ms TU Time unit 10 ms 1 ms Specifies the time unit for the timer 1 TO to T97 for the 12 I O type 2 The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored 8 16 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 I DE 8 THE TIMER Valid Devices Parameter Funtion 1 Q R TC TP C CC CP B D AI Constant EN Executioninput X X X X X X X 0 TP1 ON time X X TP2 OFF time X X TP3 Pulse number time X X Timing Chart 1 When the operation mode is continuance Execution input ON EN OFF Pulses are continuously output while the execution input is on Out
234. me are configured on the parameter tabs In this case the day of the week and the time cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For constant settings see Configuring the day of the week and the time as constant settings on page 13 3 2 S1 First Data Register Specify the start of the data register area to store the days of the week and time settings for the WEEK FB This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK FB with data registers Settings Content Tag Name Specify the tag name or the device address for the device Device Address Shows the device address that corresponds to the tag name Shows the range of data registers used to store the settings This item changes when the device address or the number of parameter tabs changes Comment Shows the comment for the device address This item can be edited Used data registers For allocating the data register area see Parameter tab on page 13 7 3 INI Initialization Input Specify the device to initialize the days of the week and the times stored in the data register area that starts from S1 source 1 The values configured on the parameter tabs are stored in the data registers when the initialization input is turned on This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK FB with data registers 4 S2 The number of parameter tabs Specify the number of parameter tabs This setting is shared in common wi
235. me numbers T already used in any other timer FBs cannot be used When each preset value is changed during ON time OFF time or operation mode output time restriction or pulse number restriction counting the change is immediately reflected in operation If the ON time value or the OFF time value of the dual timer is changed during counting the dual timer operates as follows 1 If the changed ON time TP1 is larger than the current value the ON time counting continues until the current value reaches the changed ON time 2 If the changed ON time TP1 is less than or equal to current value the output immediately turns off and the OFF time counting starts 3 If the changed OFF time TP2 is larger than the current value the OFF time counting continues until the current value reaches the changed OFF time 4 If the changed OFF time TP2 is less than or equal to the current value the output immediately turns on and the ON time counting starts The preset values can be changed by external devices such as operator interfaces WindLDR and LCD and buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro Touch The changed preset values are stored in the RAM and the changes are not reflected to the user program saved in the ROM When the SmartAXIS is turned off the changed preset values are reset to the original values stored in the ROM For details on how to store the changed preset values to the user program in the ROM see The timer FB TIMU On delay Co
236. me required to create a new CSV file create file and output header is 870 us 16 8 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 16 THE DATA LOGGING Notes e The maximum number of TRACE FB that can be programmed in a user program is three Make sure that the folder name specified by the TRACE FB is not conflicted with any of the folder names specified by the other TRACE FB When the folders are conflicted trace data with a mixed format is output to the same CSV file The number of scans of which the trace data can be saved to the CSV file when the TRACE FB is executed one time depends on the number of devices specified to trace and the display type for each device For details see 8 Trace data size on page 16 11 While the execution input to the TRACE FB is on the trace data is repeatedly output to the CSV file When you want to output the trace data only one time add a SOTU Shot up or SOTD FB Shot down to the input conditions For SOTU Shot up or SOTD FB Shot down function block see SOTU Shot Up on page 7 8 and SOTD Shot Down on page 7 9 The data writing process to the SD memory card for the TRACE FB takes several scans Once a TRACE FB is executed the process continues until the trace data transfer is complete regardless of any change in the execution input for TRACE FB While the trace data is being written to the SD memory card the TRACE FB is not executed even when the execution input to th
237. mer e Timer accuracy due to software configuration depends on three factors timer input errors timer counting errors and timeout output errors These errors are not constant but vary with the user program and other causes a Timer input error The Actual timer input state is read at the END processing and stored to the input memory For this reason an error occurs depending on the timing when the actual timer input turns on in a scan cycle The same error occurs on the normal input and the catch input Error Definition Tie The time from the external input turns on to the END processing Tet The time from the END processing to the timer FB execution Minimum error Maximum error TIMU TIMU Program END END Program END END processing 1 processing 1 Actual input i Actual input ESSE Dd i Input memory Input memory Timer start Timer start E gt Tet One scan time When the actual input turns on immediately before the END processing Tie 0 In this case the timer input error is only Tet behind error and is at its minimum 5 5 Tie lt e One scan time When the actual input turns on immediately after the END processing Tie one scan time In this case the timer input error is Tet 1 scan time Tet behind error and is at its maximum a Timer counting error Every timer FBs operation is based on individual as
238. mer Compares the specified day of the week ON time and OFF time with the current time and outputs that result Symbol EN WEEK OUT INI Operation While the execution input EN is on the output OUT is turned on when the current day of the week and time reaches the day of the week and the time specified by the ON settings The output OUT is turned off when the current day of the week and time reaches the day of the week and the time specified by the OFF settings For example if the ON settings are Monday 13 00 and the OFF settings are Wednesday 18 00 output OUT turns on and off as follows 18 00 an Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday zu Time lt Output OFF ON settings Day of the week Monday OFF settings Day of the week Wednesday Time 13 00 Time 18 00 Notes A maximum of 10 WEEK FB be used a user program e Normally the output is only updated when the current time reaches the ON OFF settings time but when the WEEK FB execution input turns from off to on the output state at the current time is updated according to the ON OFF settings e When pulse output is enabled the output is turned on for one scan at the ON settings time When the WEEK FB execution input turns from off to on according to the comparison of the current day of the week and time with ON setting the output is turned on for one sc
239. mum input The output is on until the current value reaches the ON time If the operation mode is continuance the ON time changes for each cycle When the execution input is off the output is off When the execution input is on the output is turned on and off according to the Output OUT Output ON time maximum ON time minimum and cycle settings i e pulse output When the execution input is off the output is off Specify the maximum length of time that the output is on ON time T maximum The value be specified as a constant or a data register 2 TP2 ON time 0 to 65 535 Specify the minimum length of time that the output is on minimum The value can be specified as a constant or data register 2 Specify the cycle of pulse output TP3 Cycle 3 0 to 65 535 NA Parameters The value can be specified as a constant or a data register single pulse only 1 pulse is output when the execution input turns on OP Operation Single pulse The default operation mode is single pulse mode continuance continuance pulses are continuously output according to the TP1 2 and TP3 settings while the execution input is on 1 sec 100 ms TU Time unit 10 ms 1 ms Specifies the time unit for the timer 1 TO to T97 for the 12 I O type 2 The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset
240. n the dedicated USB driver must be installed in the computer For the driver installation procedure see Appendix in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Configuration Procedure 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online Communication Set Up 2 The Communication Settings dialog box is displayed Click the USB tab and then click OK Communication Settings E377 Serial USB Port Settings Ethernet Timeout 5000 Retry 2 PLC Network Setting Advanced Settings maximum data size E x 64bytes Time delay between packets Communication Options E Use HGxG Pass Through Default Cancel The communication method is now set to the USB connection Next download a user program 3 From the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Transfer gt Download gt Download The Download dialog box is displayed pe Eam Transfer Mode Binary ASCII Download Options EZ Automatic start after download E Keep output during dovnload E suspend 1 0 force before download E Automatic device clear after download E write device data file tothe PLCafter download Z Download comment data Setting Program Information synchronize PLCclock withyour computerclock after download Program Size 9196 bytes Comment Size 0 bytes Total 8196 bytes Communication Settings ona The user program is downloaded to the Sma
241. n input X X X B S1 Control register x Di Operation status x 1 Special data registers cannot be designated as S1 2 Internal relays can be designated However the first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Special internal relays cannot be designated Settings m Device tab PULS Pulse Output 9 Devices Settings PULS 1 Q0014 1 D S1 Control Register INI Initialization Input D1 OperationStatus Tag Name al em Device Address 5 Comment Cancel 1 PULS FB selection Select the PULS FB from PULS1 PULS2 PULS3 and PULSA The pulse output configurable operation mode and enabling disabling pulse counting differ depending on PULS FB pulse output port number PULS FB Pulse output Configurable operation mode Enable disable pulse counting PULSI Q14 Operation mode 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz Pulse counting can be enabled or disabled PULS2 Q15 Operation mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Pulse counting range 1 to 100 000 000 PULS3 Q16 Operation mode 0 1 Hz to 5 kHz Disable pulse counting PULSA Q17 2 S1 Control Register S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with the PULS1 PULS2 PULS3 and PULS4 FBs Starting from the specified data register 7 consecutive data registers are used The range of available data registers is 00 to 0993 and D1000 to D1993 Storage destination Function Setting details Reference PULS1
242. n off Any function block having digital output on off be connected to each Input input Unconnected inputs are handled as OFF However all inputs cannot be IN3 On off unconnected IN4 On off Output OUT Output Outputs the result of logical OR through IN4 2 Parameters 5 1 BO to B199 for the 12 I O type 2 result of logical OR on the on off states the inputs IN1 through IN4 is shown below IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 OUT Ble lel ell elelrlal alalalal alo l o Well Mel eee ee ee SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 7 3 7 THE LOGICAL OPERATION FB NOR Negative Logical OR Calculates the negative logical OR on the input signals and outputs the result Symbol gt 1 D OUT IN2 IN3 IN4 Operation The NOR FB calculates the negative logical OR on a maximum of four input signals ON OFF and outputs the result Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Numb B Block b to B999 1 uis The bl
243. n page 13 6 2 S1 First Data Register This setting is not configured when configuring the day of the week and the time as constant settings 3 INI Initialization Input This setting is not configured when configuring the day of the week and the time as constant settings 4 S2 The number of parameter tabs Specify the number of parameter tabs When this value is increased or decreased the number of parameter tabs appearing on the dialog box increases or decreases 6 bytes of the user program area are used for each parameter tab For the settings see Parameter tab on page 13 4 DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 3 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB 5 Pulse Output Select the operation for the WEEK FB output OUT This setting is applied to all parameter tabs Selected check box When the current day of the week and the time reaches the day of the week and the time configured in the ON settings the output is turned on for only one scan Cleared check box The output is turned on or off according to the ON settings and the OFF settings tab This tab configures the ON OFF settings for the output A maximum of 20 parameter tabs can be configured for 1 WEEK FB E377 WEEK Weekly Timer Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday E Friday Saturday OFF settings 2 Day of the week Sunday 7 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday OFF time hh mm Preview Week
244. ng When the day of the week or the time in the ON OFF settings is changed while the WEEK FB execution is turned on the changed data register values are reflected when the current date and time reaches the day of the week and the time specified by the ON OFF settings tab WEEK Weekly Timer E377 INI Initialization Input 3 5 4 Pulse Output S2 The number of parameter tabs 1 Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday _DataResisterallocation 6 Canel 1 Data register settings Select constant setting or indirect designation with data registers for the WEEK FB day of the week and the time configuration To configure the day of the week and the time by specifying data registers select this check box z Selected check box The day of the week and the time settings are indirectly specified by data registers Configure the day of the week and the time by using data registers The day of the week and the time can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For allocating the data register area see Data Register Allocation on page 13 8 The data registers can be initialized with the days of the week and the times configured on the parameter tabs by turning on the initialization input For initialization see 3 INI Initialization Input Note When this check box is cleared the day of the week and the time are constant settings The day of the week and the ti
245. ngs There are two methods to configure the dates for the YEAR FB Specify the method on the Device tab with Data register settings e Configure the dates as constant setting The dates for the ON OFF settings are uniquely determined The dates for the ON OFF settings cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For details see Configuring the dates as constant setting on page 13 14 e Configuring the dates by specifying data registers The dates for the ON OFF settings are configured according to the values stored in the specified data registers The dates for the ON OFF settings can be changed while the SmartAXIS is running For details see Configuring the dates by specifying data registers on page 13 17 Configuring the dates as constant setting The dates for the ON OFF settings are uniquely determined The dates for the ON OFF settings cannot be changed while the SmartAXIS is running muDevice tab YEAR Yearly Timer E377 Devices 1 Data register settings Tag Name 2 evice Address 4 Comment Pulse Output S2 The number of parameter tabs 1 Previews ves mul January gt 2013 February 2013 March 2013 Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa e mos 1 2 ER 6789012 3456789 34 5 67 89 13 4 15 16 17 18 19 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 27 28 28 30 31 24 25 26 27 28 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31
246. not be read from ROM For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual D8148 D8157 D8166 Remote I O Communication Error Status When a communication error occurs between the remote I O communication slave and master the details of the communication error are stored in these special data registers D8148 Remote I O Slave 1 Communication Error Status D8157 Remote I O Slave 2 Communication Error Status D8166 Remote I O Slave 3 Communication Error Status D8149 D8156 D8158 D8165 D8167 D8174 Remote I O Analog Input Values The analog input values 0 to 10 VDC to the remote I O analog inputs are converted to digital values 0 to 1000 and stored in the special data registers allocated to each remote I O slave Linear conversions can be configured for the analog input AT FBs Even when the linear conversions are configured for AI FBs the special data registers store the analog values 0 to 1000 before the linear conversions are applied D8149 AI10 D8150 AI11 D8151 AI12 D8152 A113 08153 114 D8154 AI15 D8155 AI16 D8156 AI17 e D8158 AI20 D8159 AI21 08160 122 08161 123 08162 124 08163 125 08164 126 08165 127 e D8167 AI30 D8168 AI31 D8169 AI32 D8170 AI33 D8171 AI34 D8172 AI35 D8173 A136 D8174 AI37 D8184 Data Register ROM Backup Start Address to Read This special data register is used for the data register ROM backup and stores the start add
247. not use the input as catch input high speed counter or frequency measurement e When using the high speed interrupt input ensure that no chatter noise occurs in the interrupt input 5 D1 Monitor Register D1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with ARAMP1 or ARAMP2 Starting from the specified data register 9 consecutive data registers are used The range of available data registers is DO to 0991 and D1000 to 01991 The monitor registers is read only Address Content Value range unit Starting number 0 Next step number 0 to 18 Starting number 1 Running step number 1 to 18 Starting number 2 Steady pulse frequency monitor Mode 0 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments mode 1 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments Starting number 3 Frequency change time monitor 10 to 10 000 ms Starting number 4 Preset value Upper i Upp 1 to 100 000 000 pulses Starting number 5 monitor Lower word Starting number 6 Upper Current value 4 1 to 100 000 000 pulses Starting number 7 Lower word Error status 0109 Starting number 8 1 The upper and lower data registers switch according to the setting of the 32 bit data storage method For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Next step number This register stores the number of the step to execute next 32 bit Data Storage Setting in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual If the
248. nputs 1 and 2 of the XOR FB 10000 10001 10002 Note single FB output connector be connected to multiple FB input connectors Multiple FB output connectors cannot be connected to single FB input connector DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 7 1 OPERATION BASICS Insert special internal relay M8121 AND B2 and output 01 and connect them with connection lines Note M8121 is a special internal relay turning on and off continuously in one second cycle For details on the special internal relay see Device Addresses Special Internal Relays Special Internal Relay Device Addresses on page 3 2 10000 7 f sec Clock M8121 Creating FBD program is completed 1 8 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 1 OPERATION BASICS Convert Program 1 Confirm that the program has been correctly created From the WindLDR menu bar click Home gt Program gt Convert If the FBs are correctly connected the conversion will be successful If any errors are found those errors are displayed in the Info Window Correct the program to clear those errors in order TESTOO pjw WINDLDR S em Paste 53 Select Terminal Basic Advanced i gt Compare Clipbo unction Block i 1 FT1A 24 USB Netwc n DEC SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 9 1 OPERATION BASICS Saving a Project 1
249. ns off counting starts and while the execution input is off the current value off delay elapsed time is incremented When the current value off delay elapsed time reaches the off delay time TP2 the output turns off When the reset input is on the output is off regardless of the on off state of the execution input Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify the Timer function block The timer number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero N mber T Timer number TO to T193 The timer number can be changed to a desired number However the timer numbers already used in any other Timer FBs cannot be used When the execution input turns on the current value on delay elapsed time TRG Execution On off starts being incremented input When the execution input turns off the current value off delay elapsed Input time starts being incremented The reset input has priority over the execution input When the reset input is RST Reset input On off on the output is off regardless of the on off state of the execution input When unconnected the reset input is handled as off The output turns on in the situations below e When the current value equals the on delay time TP1 Output OUT Output The output turns off in the situations below When the current value equals the off delay time TP2 When th
250. nter on the special characters list window popped up when Special Character is pressed For the special characters see 8 Special Character on page 14 4 7 Insert Overwrite Selects whether to insert or overwrite characters when entering new characters 14 6 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 THE INTERFACE FB Insert Text with Effect The specified text can be displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD When scrolling is disabled When scrolling is enabled Insert Text with Effect insert Text with Effect 9 1 Display Option zz Scroll Display Option Scroll E Blinking E Blinking El Invert Invert 2 Occupied Area Row xColumn 1x24 Occupied Area Row x Column 1x24 3 Input Text Directly Input Text Directly 5 6 5 6 Text Special Character Overwrite Text e 4 Select from Text Manager 4 Select from Text Manager Open Text Manager Cancel Cancel 1 Display Option Configure the options to scroll blink or invert the specified text For the scroll unit scroll speed and blinking speed see MSG FB Common Settings on page 14 9 Display Option Description Scroll Scrolls the specified text Blinking Blinks the specified text Invert Invert the display of the specified text 2 Occupied Area Shows the size of the area to be used on the LCD screen Lines 1 columns 1 to 24
251. o 20 and Origin to 0 Disable the blinking settings Insert Bar Graph EN Device 00002 00002 Data Integer 1 E Maximum soe Minimum Origin o Occupied Area RowxColumn 1 24 Minimum Origin Maximum Blinking Settings Upper Limit Lower Limit 16 After the settings are configured click OK The configured content is displayed on the LCD screen area MSG Message E3777 Options Priority o Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display Special Data Special Character Overwrite Word Device M0000 BitDevice Text with Effect Bar Graph DATE Cancel DE SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 15 14 THE INTERFACE FB Configuring the special data 17 Select the left edge of the fourth line and click Special Data moma l Options Priority 0 Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display EBENEN The Special Data List window is poped up 18 Double click on the Current date Special Data Occupied Area Row x Column Current time
252. o 6 step Interrupt step number 00000 6 1 to 6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Operation mode Mode 1 200 Hz to 100 kHz Reversible control enable Disabled Number of steps 6 Start step number 1 Step 1 Interrupt step number 0000 6 Step 6 15 42 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 Step 1 settings 15 THE PULSE FB ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table ex Devices Settings Ramp Table ae Function DR Description Steady pulse frequency D0002 500 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 x10 Hz Frequency change time D0003 5000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value 00004 00005 100000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction 00006 Acceleration deceleration contral 00006 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number D0007 2 0 to 6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency 0002 500 5 kHz Frequency change time 0003 5000 5 000 msec Preset value D0004 00005 100000 Preset value 100 000 Control direction 0006 Acceleration deceleration control D0006 Acceleration deceleration later Acceleration deceleration later 2 Next step number D0007 2 Step 2 Step 2 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table ex Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Description
253. o IEC 60664 1 e While moving or transporting prevent the SmartAXIS from falling otherwise damage or malfunction of the SmartAXIS will result e Wiring must use lead sizes that are appropriate for the applied voltage and current Terminal screws must be tightened with the prescribed tightening torque e Prevent metal fragments and pieces of wire from dropping inside the SmartAXIS housing Put a cover on the SmartAXIS modules during installation and wiring Ingress of such fragments and chips may cause fire hazard damage or malfunction e Use a power supply of the rated value Use of the wrong power supply may cause fire hazard e Use an IEC 60127 approved fuse on the power line outside the SmartAXIS This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is designed for use in Europe e Use an IEC 60127 approved fuse on the output circuit This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is designed for use in Europe e Use an EU approved circuit breaker This is required when equipment containing the SmartAXIS is destined for Europe e Make sure of safety before starting and stopping the SmartAXIS or when operating the SmartAXIS to force outputs on or off Incorrect operation of the SmartAXIS may cause machine damage or accidents Do not connect the ground wire directly to the SmartAXIS Connect a protective ground to the cabinet containing the SmartAXIS using M4 or larger screw This is required when equipment containing the
254. ocated for the OFF time maximum T2 timer specified with the timer number 2 is allocated for the cycle 3 The preset value be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored RPULS RPULS RPULS RPULS 1 sec 100 ms 10 ms 1 ms dm 0 to 65535 seconds 0 to 6553 5 seconds 0 to 655 35 seconds 0 to 65 535 seconds e The time numbers T already used in any other timer FBs cannot be used e If ON time maximum value ON time minimum value or cycle value are changed during counting the changes are reflected in operation from the next cycle e The preset values can be changed by external devices such as operator interfaces WindLDR and LCD and buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro Touch The changed preset values are stored in the RAM and the changes are not reflected to the user program saved in the ROM When the SmartAXIS is turned off the changed preset values are reset to the original values stored in the ROM e For details on how to store the changed preset values to the user program in the ROM see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer on page 8 1 e Since the timer has advance error or behind error that error may cause a problem depending on the system For details see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer Timer Accuracy on page 8 3
255. ock number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used IN1 On off IN2 On off Any function block having digital output on off can be connected to each Input input Unconnected inputs are handled as OFF However all inputs cannot be IN3 On off unconnected IN4 On off Output OUT Output Outputs the result of negative logical OR on IN1 through IN4 2 Parameters 1 BO to B199 for the 12 type 2 The result of negative logical OR on the on off states of the inputs IN1 through IN4 is shown below IN1 IN2 IN3 4 OUT Oe er er 4 7 4 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE Exclusive Logical Calculates the exclusive logical OR on the input signals and outputs the result Symbol 1 IN2 Operation OUT 7 THE LOGICAL OPERATION FB The XOR FB calculates the exclusive logical OR on a maximum of two input signals ON OFF and outputs the result Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function bloc
256. off in one second cycle ON OFF Note A group of FBs containing an output FB and all FBs connected on the left side of the output FB is called a circuit block The output of the output FB is the execution result of a single circuit block Insert input IO 1 From the WindLDR menu bar click Home gt Function Block gt Terminal gt I Digital Input PN E Configuration Online View gt Convert gt F3 Download Basic Advanced Draw Line he Compare SM Special Internal Relay TESTOO pjw WINDLDR R Shift Register Al Analog Input Q Digital Output M Internal Relay Input IO is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer DEC SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 3 1 OPERATION BASICS Insert the AND logical AND FB 1 From the WindLDR menu bar click Home gt Function Block gt Basic gt AND Logical AND or E T T NAND Negative Logical AND OR Logical OR NOR Negative Logical OR XOR Exclusive Logical OR XNOR Negative Exclusive Logical OR NOT Negation SOTU ShotUp SOTD Shot Down TRUTH Truth Table Timer Counter Shift Register AND BO is inserted at the position of the mouse pointer 1 4 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 OPERATION BASICS Connect input 0 and AND BO with a connection line 1 From the WindLDR menu bar click Home gt Line gt Draw Lin
257. og input FB can be specified only when W word or I integer is specified as the data type Timing Chart When the execution input is off the output is turned off ON Execution input OFF Upper limit UL Lower limit LL 4 4 Comparison value DATA ON E 1 Output OUT OFF When the comparison value exceeds When the comparison value falls below the upper limit the output is turned on the lower limit the output is turned on 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 When the execution input EN is on the output OUT is turned on off as described below 1 When the comparison value DATA is less than the lower limit the output is turned on 2 When the comparison value is greater than the upper limit the output is turned on 3 When the comparison value is between the lower limit and upper limit the output is turned off When the execution input is off the output is turned off The upper limit and lower limit must be properly configured so that the upper limit UL is always greater than the lower limit LL Note When the upper limit UL is less than or equal to the lower limit LL a user program execution error occurs and the output is turned off For user program execution errors see Chapter 14 User Program Execu
258. oii cp enu En rho tete har p ao dachcasesssasedecuceeepanteddsasaancbidenedectedeedevaas 3 2 Special Data REGISters ET DEERI 3 6 FB Reference ju 4 1 Advanced Instruction Applicable SmartAXIS nennen nemen tuna nun hen enhn 4 7 Applicable Data 22 tke SR SENE 4 8 input FB T Digital cerren anan eara 5 1 SM Special Internal Relay 2 22 2 1 m eene cotta rre bn enne ra xa ER Ya Rie 5 2 Slc M 5 3 Figli 5 4 The output FB oxipeceru3 6 1 6 2 logical operation FB Pp NAND Negative Logical AND aiaa OR Logical OR NOR Negative Logical OR XOR Exclusive Logical OR XNOR Negative Exclusive Logical EPUM SOTU
259. on the current value returns to the preset value When the reset input turns on the current value becomes 0 and the output turns off immediately regardless of the on off state of the execution input Notes TO to T199 be used for the timer number However for the 12 I O type TO to T99 can be used e The preset value can be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored FB TIMOD 1 sec TIMOD 100 ms TIMOD 10 ms TIMOD 1ms 8 10 The range of Preset 0 to 65535 seconds value 0 to 6553 5 seconds 0 to 655 35 seconds 0 to 65 535 seconds The time numbers T already used in any other timer FBs cannot be used Even if the preset value for the off delay count down timer is changed during counting the timer continues to operate with the original preset value until the execution input turns on When the execution input turns on the new preset value is reflected in the current value However if the preset value is changed to 0 the counting stops and the output immediately turns off The preset values can be changed by external devices such as operator interfaces WindLDR and LCD and buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro Touch The changed preset values are stored in the RAM and the changes are not reflected to the user program saved in the ROM When the
260. on the output is turned off regardless of the on off state of the set input Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The block number can Numbe B Block numbe BO to B999 a d be changed a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used SET Set input On off When the set input is on the output is set Input When the reset input is on the output is reset RST Reset input On off i When unconnected the input is handled as off Output OUT Output The output is set reset according to the inputs Parameters 1 BO to B199 for the 12 I O type 2 For the output logic see the table below Set input Reset input Output Description 0 The output does not change 0 1 0 The output is reset 1 0 1 The output is set 1 1 0 The output is reset the reset input is executed with a higher precedence than the set input Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T cc B D AI Constant SET Set input X X X X X X RST Reset input X X X X X X X SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 18 3 18 THE SPECIAL Timing Chart When the reset input is off the output is set with th
261. on Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D0002 100 100 Hz Frequency change time D0003 2000 2 000 msec Preset value D0004 D0005 4000 Preset value 4 000 Control direction D0006 Acceleration deceleration control D0006 Acceleration deceleration later Acceleration deceleration later 2 Next step number D0007 2 Step 2 Step 2 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table ex Devices Settings Ramp Table I u 4 E ENTE Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Be 77 Steady pulse frequency 00008 1000 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz mum Frequency change time 00009 2000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value 00010 00011 4000 100 000 000 Control direction 00012 Acceleration deceleration control 00012 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number D0013 3 0 to 3 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D0008 1000 1 000 Hz Frequency change time D0009 2000 2 000 msec Preset value D0010 D0011 4000 Preset value 4 000 Control direction D0012 Acceleration deceleration control D0012 Acceleration deceleration later Acceleration deceleration later 2 Next step number D0013 3 Step 3 DEC SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 37 15 THE PULSE Step 3 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output
262. onnected Port Number Every 1 sec 3 12 3 8 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 DEC 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES Device Address Description Updated See Page When executing data D8133 Data Register ROM Backup Execution Status register ROM backup 3 13 read and write D8134 High Word Current Value Frequency ta E 3 11 D8135 Low Word Measurement Value 16 08136 High speed High Word 8137 Counter Low Word Preset Value 3 11 Group 5 16 E D8138 High Word Reset Value 3 11 D8139 Low Word D8140 High Word Current Value Frequency 2 3 11 D8141 Low Word Measurement Value 17 D8142 High speed High Word psia Counter Low Word Preset Value 3 11 Group 6 17 08144 High Word Reset Value 3 11 D8145 Low Word D8146 Reserved D8147 D8148 Communication Error Status When error occurred 3 13 D8149 Analog Input AI10 Every scan 3 13 D8150 Analog Input AI11 Every scan 3 13 D8151 Analog Input AI12 Every scan 3 13 2 2 Remote I O D8152 svei Analog Input 113 Every scan 3 13 D8153 Analog Input 114 Every scan 3 13 D8154 Analog Input 115 Every scan 3 13 D8155 Analog Input 116 Every scan 3 13 D8156 Analog Input 117 Every scan 3 13 D8157 Communication Error Status When error occurred 3 1
263. onnected to INI D100 is specified to 51 the internal relay M200 is specified to D1 1000 PWM2 0000 M0000 PWM2 FB execution input I000 Pulse width ratio D0101 X w2 X w3 wii 2 Output pulse 015 Pulse output M0200 Pulse output complete M0201 wi w2 w3 width ratio When the PWM2 FB execution input 10 turns from off to on M200 turns on and pulses are output with the width ratio configured by D101 e If the value of D101 is changed during pulse output pulses are output with the width ratio based on that value The interval period for changing the width ratio has to be sufficiently long as compared to the output pulse frequency e When the PWM2 FB execution input turns from on to off M200 turns off and M201 turns on e The state of the initialization input MO are not reflected while the PWM2 FB execution input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the execution input 15 10 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 m DEC RAMP Ramp Pulse Output The RAMP FB outputs pulses with a frequency change function 15 THE PULSE FB Symbol EN RAMP1 OUT EN RAMP2 OUT INI INI DIR DIR Operation When the execution input EN turns on pulses of the specified initial pulse frequency are output from the pulse output port and then the pulse frequency is increased l
264. onnection 1 METER ON Connected OFF Not Connected Operating cleared Read Connection 2 8111 Connection Status ON Connected OFF Not Connected Operating Cleared Read Connection 3 MATIS ON Connected OFF Not Connected Operating cleared Read 8 Reserved 8120 Initialize Pulse Cleared Cleared Read M8121 1 sec Clock Operating Cleared Read M8122 100 ms Clock Operating Cleared Read M8123 10 ms Clock Operating Cleared Read M8124 Timer Counter Preset Value Changed Maintained Cleared Read M8125 In operation Output Cleared Cleared Read Gees Reserved 8154 Write Operating Cleared Read Write Data Register ROM Backup M8155 Read Operating Cleared Read Write ME Reserved 8160 ESC Key Up Key Cleared Cleared Read M8161 ESC Key Down Key Cleared Cleared Read ___ _ Key Input Status M8162 ESC Key Left Key Cleared Cleared Read M8163 ESC Key Right Key Cleared Cleared Read 5 Reserved M8166 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read M8167 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read M8170 High speed Counter Group5 I6 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read M8171 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read M8172 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read M8173 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read M8174 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read M8175 High speed Counter Group 6 I7 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read M8176 Comparison ON Status Maintained
265. onship between the up clock input and the reset input The reset input has a higher precedence than the up clock input The up clock input is enabled when one scan has elapsed after the reset input changes from on to off ON Reset input RST OFF ON m Up clock input UP i OFF 0 N Enabled N Disabled M Enabled Requires 1 scan or more Notes 0 to C199 can be used for the counter number For the 12 1 0 type CO to C99 can be used e The counter numbers already used in any other counter FBs cannot be used e When the adding counter CNT is in the count up state the current value does not change even when the up clock input is turned on e When the preset value or the current value of the adding counter CNT FB is changed the FB behaves as follows Operation Adding counter behavior When the current value or the preset value is changed in the count up state and the preset value is not equal the current value When the current value becomes greater than the preset value while the CNT CNT FB counts up immediately and the output is is not in the count up state turned on The count up state is maintained The output is turned on regardless of the current value When the preset value is set to 0 while the reset input is on The count is ended but the output is not turned on When the preset value is set to 0 e The preset values can be changed by external devices such as operator interfaces Wind
266. ontrol mode that can be selected differs according to the pulse output port number For the combinations of pulse output port numbers and the reversible control mode see 8 Reversible control enable on page 15 31 2 51 Control Register S1 specifies the starting number of the data registers to use with the ARAMP1 and ARAMP2 FBs Starting from the specified data register 2 6xN number of steps consecutive data registers are used The range of available data register is DO to D992 dependent on the number of steps Each step operates with the settings that are configured when the steps start If the settings for the step being executed are changed after it starts running those changes are not reflected while the step is running Storage destination Starting number 0 Function Interrupt number Setting details 1 to 18 Starting number 1 Reserved Reference 11 Interrupt step number on page 15 32 Step 1 6 words Starting number 2 Steady pulse frequency Mode 0 1 to 10 000 1 Hz increments Mode 1 20 to 10 000 10 Hz increments 13 Steady pulse frequency on page 15 32 Starting number 3 Frequency change time 10 to 10 000 ms 14 Frequency change time on page 15 32 Starting number 4 Preset value upper Starting number 5 Preset value lower word 1 to 100 000 000 pulses 15 Preset value on page 15 32 Starting number 6 Step options
267. oting 2 Error Information 2 2 Program Execution Error in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual D8008 D8021 Calendar Clock Data D8008 through D8021 are used for reading calendar clock data from the internal clock and for writing calendar clock data to the internal clock D8022 D8025 Scan Time Data D8022 through D8025 are special data registers for checking the scan time and configuring the constant scan time For details on the scan time see the following manuals e Chapter 5 Special Functions Constant Scan Time in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Chapter 12 Control Function in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual D8026 Communication Mode Information Port 2 and Port 3 Communication mode information of port 2 and port 3 is stored to D8026 Bit Bit Bit Bit Bit 15 8 7 4 0 D8026 Port 3 Port 2 Maintenance Communication User Communication Modbus RTU Master Modbus RTU Slave 3 10 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES D8027 D8028 Slave Number The slave number is stored to D8027 and D8028 when the communication mode for port 2 and 3 is maintenance communication or Modbus RTU slave The slave number can be specified with either a constant or a data register in the function area settings When data register is specified the slave number can be changed by storing the slave number in D8027 and
268. output OUT is turned on or off Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is l automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The block number can Number B Block number be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used EN Execution On off When the execution input is on the comparison value is compared with the input ON threshold and the OFF threshold The comparison value A This value can be specified as an analog input a data register a timer Comparison DATA current value preset value a counter current value preset value or a Nae constant 3 Unconnected inputs are handled as 0 The threshold to turn on the output Input This value can be specified as an analog input a data register a timer ON ON threshold current value preset value counter current value preset value or constant 3 Unconnected inputs are handled as 0 The threshold to turn off the output This value can be specified as an analog input a data register a timer OFF OFF threshold current value preset value a counter current value preset value or a constant Unconnected inputs are handled as 0 When the execution input is on the comparison value is compared with the Output OUT Output ON threshold and the OFF threshol
269. output on off be connected Output OUT On off Outputs the result of negating the input IN 2 Parameters 1 to B199 for the 12 1 type 2 result of negating input IN is shown below IN OUT 0 1 1 0 IDE SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 7 7 7 THE LOGICAL OPERATION FB SOTU Shot Up Turns on the output for one scan when the input signal changes from off to on Symbol IN SOTU OUT Operation The SOTU FB turns on the output for one scan when the input signal changes from OFF to ON Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block Number B Block number BO to B999 The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used Input IN On off Any function block having digital output on off can be connected The output turns on for an interval of one scan when the input IN changes from OFF to ON 2 Parameters Output OUT On off 1 BO to B199 for the 12 type 2 The timing chart of the SOTU is shown below ON IN OFF 24 ON OUT OFF 7 8 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 7 THE LOGICAL
270. output 0000 Monday to Friday each week from 8 30 to 17 15 as an example Select the Data register settings check box and set 51 to 00000 and INI to 0000 WEEK Weekly Timer a WEEK Weekly Timer E377 Devices pa Devices settings Day of the week 7 Data register settings E Sunday V Monday J Tuesday 2 Wednesday V Thursday V Friday Saturday 51 First DR INI Initialization Input 00000 0000 m ON time hh mm Device Address poooo 0000 e H B D0000 D0002 Tee OFF settings us Day of te Day of the week sunday Monday V Tuesday V Wednesday Thursday J Friday E Saturday OFF time hh mm v E s E Pulse Output 52 The number of parametertabs 1 r Preview Week Day Week Day OFF OFF me m cum Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Data RegisterAllocation Cancel Data Register Allocation Cancel Data Register Allocation The settings on the P 1 tab are allocated to data registers 00000 to 00002 as shown the table below The settings configured the parameter tab are stored 00000 to 00002 when the initialization input INI is turned on Data Registers Settings Initial setting D0000 Day of the week setting 15934 Monday to Friday both ON se
271. owever the shift register numbers already used in any other shift register FBs cannot be used Input Output OUT Output Outputs the on off state of the specified shift register Parameters SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 5 3 5 AI Analog Input Linearly converts the analog input value 0 to 1000 and outputs the converted value Symbol Operation AOUT The analog input FB linearly converts the analog input value 0 to 1000 and outputs the converted value Specify an analog input terminal number Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify the analog input FB Number AIO to AI37 Specify an analog input terminal number However the analog input numbers already used in any other analog input FBs cannot be used Input analog input FB linearly converts the value 0 to 1000 of the specified analog input terminal and outputs the converted value in the range between Output AOUT Analog output the linear conversion minimum maximum values The analog input value before the linear conversion is stored in the special data register Parameters Linear Specifies the minimum value in the range between 32768 and 32767 for the MIN conversion RAM linear conversion Set this par
272. p Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D0014 5000 50 kHz Frequency change time D0015 8000 8 000 msec Preset value D0016 D0017 10000000 Preset value 1 000 000 Control direction D0018 s Acceleration deceleration control D0018 Acceleration deceleration later Acceleration deceleration later 2 Next step number D0019 4 Step 4 Step 4 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table E2757 Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step2 Steady pulse frequency 00020 500 20 to 10 000 in increments of 1 10 Hz ien Frequency change time D0021 8000 10 to 10 000 inincrements of 1 ms T Preset value D0022 D0023 1000000 1 to 100 000 000 Control direction 00024 Acceleration deceleration contral 00024 Acceleration deceleration later Step 6 ext eles ramets 00025 5 0 to 6 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency 0020 500 5 kHz Frequency change time D0021 8000 8 000 msec Preset value D0022 D0023 1000000 Preset value 1 000 000 Control direction 0024 Acceleration deceleration control 0024 Acceleration deceleration later Acceleration deceleration later 2 Next step number D0025 5 Step 5 15 44 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 THE PULSE Step 5 settings ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table EN Devices Settings Ramp Table H
273. peed Counter in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual 3 Specify the group number of the high speed counter configured in WindLDR The high speed counter does not operate when the high speed counter is not configured for the specified group The valid range of the group number differs with each SmartAXIS series IDE SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 18 1 18 THE SPECIAL FB SmartAXIS Range 12 I O type 1to4 24 40 48 I O types 1to6 Touch 1to5 Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP cc B D AI Constant GT Gate input X X X X X X X RST Reset input X X X X X X X CLR Clear input X X X X X X X Detailed description Before starting the counting operation store the initial values in the reset value in the special data registers and the next preset value number and preset values in the control registers using other FBs such as SCRPT FB Turn on the reset input RST to store the reset value in the current value Turn off the reset input once resetting the current value is finished When the gate input GT is turned on the counting operation begins The preset values are stored in the control registers The preset value specified with the current preset value number is active The active preset value number for the current comparison is stored in the current preset value number The preset value number to be active after the current comparison is automatic
274. put ON OUT orc TA prem Am Meee lt gt lt ON time ON time 1 OFF time OFF time 2 When the operation mode is pulse number restriction Execution input ON EN OFF zi J ON OFF 1 Output 1 8 QUT ko lt gt ON time ON time ON time ME lt gt lt gt lt gt OFF time OFF time OFF time Pulse count 1 2 1 After the specified number of If the execution input turns off before reaching pulses are output pulse output stops the specified number of pulses the output also turns off 3 When the operation mode is output time restriction Execution input ON EN OFF el LEP LI ES LiL OFF Output i Pod 3 di ij ON time ON time ON time bos lt gt lt gt i lt gt OFF time OFF time Time 10 seconds i 5 seconds After the elapsed time reaches the If the execution input turns off before reaching specified time pulse output stops the specified time the output also turns off When the execution input EN is off the current value returns to 0 When the execution input EN turns on the current value ON time elapsed time starts being incremented According to the operation mode the output is on for the duration of ON time TP1 and off for the duration of OFF time TP2 1 When the operation mode is continuance Wh
275. put On off port according to the control register S1 settings When the execution input is off the pulse output stops Initialization When the initialization input is on the initial values configured in the Input INI input On off Settings tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers When the interrupt input turns on the pulse output process for the running INT Interrupt input On off step is aborted and pulse output restarts with the settings for the step specified by the interrupt number Output OUT Output When the pulse output has completed the output turns and keeps Pulse output port ARAMP1 Specify the pulse output port number for the ARAMP FB The pulse output number ARAMP2 port differs with ARAMP1 and ARAMP2 221 The control data registers 51 Control register the number of Starting from the specified data register 2 6xN N number of steps consecutive data registers used steps Parameters The monitor data registers D1 Monitor register DO to D931 Starting from the specified data register 9 consecutive data registers are D1000 to D1991 used The operation status D2 Operation status MO to M1270 Starting from the specified internal relay 5 consecutive internal relays are used 1 The bit device such as an external input 10 to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are wr
276. puts are handled as ON However all inputs cannot be IN3 On off unconnected IN4 On off Output OUT Output Outputs the result of negative logical AND on IN1 through IN4 2 Parameters 1 BO to B199 for the 12 type 2 The result of negative logical AND on the on off states of the inputs IN1 through IN4 is shown below IN1 IN2 IN3 4 OUT ojo oje o 7 2 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDEC 7 THE LOGICAL OPERATION FB OR Logical OR Calculates the logical OR on the input signals and outputs the result Symbol gt 1 OUT IN2 IN3 IN4 Operation The OR FB calculates the logical OR on a maximum of four input signals ON OFF and outputs the result Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Numbe B Block numbe to B999 1 T The block number be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used IN1 On off IN O
277. quentially from the input FBs FBs other than the input FBs incorporate the operation results of the other FBs connected to the input connectors process the operation and output the result from the output connector The FBs are executed in order from the FBs connected to the input FBs and the execution of a single circuit block is complete when the data is passed to the output FB digital output internal relay When all the circuit blocks have completed executing program execution for one scan is complete Note e After the 00 01 and circuit blocks have executed the circuit blocks are executed in M0000 M0001 and Mx order e 5 that are not connected to output FBs digital output internal relay in other words the FBs that do not compose a circuit block are not executed e For input FBs the most recent input state acquired by refreshing the I O at the end of the scan is output from the output connector e Output connectors of output FBs digital output internal relay can be connected to the input connectors of the other FBs Output from the output connector of output FBs is the state of the output FB in the previous scan For example in the FBD program in the following diagram Q4 turns on four scans after 110 turns on Fi DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 4 15 4 4 16 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 5 THE INPUT This chapter describes the input F
278. r The specified script does not exist 3 Device access error Invalid device specified device boundary exceeded If an arithmetic error or a device access error occurs script processing is canceled immediately and the execution of the SCRPT FB is terminated If the script ID error occurs only D1 and D1 1 are updated and the execution of the SCRPT FB is terminated Execution time The execution time from when the specified script starts executing until it completes is stored 100 us increments Example If it takes 1 45 ms for the specified script to complete 15 is stored as the execution time e fit takes 6553 5 ms or longer for the specified script to complete 65535 is stored as the execution time The SCRPT FB execution time is affected by interrupt processing and other processing that occurs during the script execution If any error occurs other than the script ID error the script execution time from when the script starts execution until the error occurs is stored as the execution time If the script ID error occurs 0 is stored as the execution time Script Selection To specify a registered script ID for S1 select the SCRPT FB and click button displayed to the right of S1 in the Property Sheet to open the Script Manager dialog box Select the script and click Select button and then the selected script ID is entered to S1 of the SCRPT FB 17 2 SMARTAXTS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 18 THE SPECIAL The spe
279. r clock data is read from the internal clock to the special data registers D8008 to D8014 M8014 turns on If calendar clock data is read successfully M8014 turns off M8016 Calendar Data Write Flag When M8016 is turned on data data registers 08015 through 08018 calendar new data are set to the internal clock M8017 Clock Data Write Flag When M8017 is turned on data data registers 08019 through D8021 clock new data set to the internal clock M8020 Calendar Clock Data Write Flag When M8020 is turned data data registers 08015 through D8021 calendar clock new data are set to the internal clock M8021 Clock Data Adjust Flag When M8021 is turned on the clock is adjusted with respect to seconds If seconds are between 0 and 29 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes remain the same If seconds are between 30 and 59 for current time adjustment for seconds will be set to 0 and minutes are incremented by one M8025 Maintain Outputs While CPU Stopped Outputs are normally turned off when the CPU is stopped M8025 is used to maintain the output statuses when the CPU is stopped When the CPU is stopped with M8025 turned on the output ON OFF statuses are maintained When the CPU restarts M8025 is turned off automatically 3 4 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DEC 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES M8026 SD Memory Card Status When an SD memory card is inserted into the SmartAXIS M
280. r on the SD memory card Output sample Triggered at 2012 02 06 10 20 30 Scan 0000 D0001 D0002 D0003 D0004 D0005 D0010 Old 12345 2 12345 56789 1 56789 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12347 56789 1 56788 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12349 56789 1 56787 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12379 56789 1 56772 3 402823E 38 12345 2 12381 56789 1 56771 3 402823E 38 New 12345 2 12383 56789 1 56770 3 402823E 38 The sample user program operates as follows e 001 is turned when the writing trace data to the SD memory card completes e The TRACE FB status code is stored to D100 The status code saved in D100 is checked 00 is turned on if an error occurs e Configuration Procedure 1 Insert each function block in the function block editor odor 80002 0003 7 0000 2 Configure the TRACE FB Configure the Devices tab 1 Designate 00100 as D1 Execution Status TRACE Data Tracing IN 1 D1 Execution Status Devices Settings Tag Name D0100 Device Address 00100 Comment Cancel DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 16 13 16 THE DATA LOGGING Configure the Settings tab 2 Enter RESULT in 51 Folder Name 3 Configure 00000 to output the decimal value of 00000 to the CSV files with the data type W word 4 Set the repeat to 6 to output the values of D000
281. racy on page 8 3 TIMOU Off delay Count Up Timer When the execution input turns off counting starts and the current value is incremented When the elapsed time reaches the specified off delay time the output turns off Symbol TRG TIMOU RST 1 sec TRG TIMOU RST 10 ms Operation OUT OUT 8 THE TIMER FB TRG TIMOU OUT RST 100 ms TRG TIMOU OUT RST ims When the execution input TRG turns on while the reset input RST is off the current value returns to 0 and the output OUT turns on While the execution input is on the output is on When the execution input turns off the current value starts being incremented While the execution input is off the current value is incremented and when it reaches the preset value the output turns off The current value is held until the execution input turns on When the reset input turns on the output immediately turns off regardless of the on off state of the execution input Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Parameters Parameter Number T Function Timer number Range to T199 4 X X X Description Unique number to identify the Timer function block The timer number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero The timer number can be changed to a desired number However the timer numbers already used in any other Timer FBs cannot be used TRG Input Execution input
282. re the execution result is stored 2 words are result 01998 3 used starting from the specified data register 1 to B199 for the 12 1 type 2 For a constant specify the value in the range of 1 to 255 To indirectly specify the value with a data register specify it with the data register number where the value is stored and specify the content of the data register in the range of 1 to 255 3 DO to D398 for the 12 I O type IDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 17 1 17 THE SCRIPT FB Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T cc B D AI Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X X S1 Script ID X X Di Execution result X 1 S1 Script ID Specifies the script ID A constant or data register can be specified 2 D1 Execution result The execution status and the execution time are stored in 2 consecutive data registers starting from the specified data register number The range of available data register numbers is DO to D998 and D1000 to 01998 Storage destination Description Di The script execution status error code at script completion is stored 01 1 The execution time from when script starts executing until it completes is stored 100 us increments Execution status Numeric value Status Description 0 Normal termination 1 Arithmetic error Divide by zero floating point format error 2 Script ID erro
283. red Read M8044 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read M8045 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read M8046 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read M8047 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read M8050 Reset Status Maintained Cleared Read High speed Counter Group 3 13 M8051 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read M8052 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read M8053 Underflow Maintained Cleared Read M8054 Count Direction Maintained Cleared Read 3 2 SMARTAXISS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDEC 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES IDEC Description Power OFF Read Write M8055 Comparison Output Reset Cleared Cleared Read M8056 Gate Input Maintained Cleared Read M8057 High speed Counter Group 4 15 Reset Input Maintained Cleared Read M8060 Comparison ON Status Maintained Cleared Read M8061 Overflow Maintained Cleared Read Reserved 8076 SD Memory Card Access Stop Flag Operating Cleared Write ae Reserved 8090 Group 1 10 Maintained Cleared Read M8091 Group 2 12 Maintained Cleared Read M8092 Group 3 13 Maintained Cleared Read Catch Input ON OFF Status M8093 Group 4 I5 Maintained Cleared Read M8094 Group 5 I6 Maintained Cleared Read M8095 Group 6 I7 Maintained Cleared Read 2 Reserved C
284. red in the RAM and the changes are not reflected to the user program saved in the ROM When the SmartAXIS is turned off the changed preset values are reset to the original values stored in the ROM e For details on how to store the changed preset value to the user program in the ROM see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer on page 8 1 e Since the timer has advance error or behind error that error may cause a problem depending on the system For details see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer Timer Accuracy on page 8 3 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 15 8 THE TIMER DTIM Dual Timer The output is on for the length of the specified ON time and off for the length of specified OFF time This operation is repeated EN DTIM OUT EN DTIM OUT 100 ms 100 ms EN DTIM OUT EN DTIM OUT 10 ms 1 ms Operation When the execution input EN is on the output OUT is on for the length of the specified ON time TP1 and off for the length of the specified OFF time TP2 When the execution input is on the on off operation of the output is repeated according to the operation mode When the execution input is off the output is off Symbol Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify the Timer function block Number Timern mber TO to T197 1 The timer number is automatically assign
285. rent value 14 4 Initial value CP1 When the current value When the current When the current value is 11 the output is When the preset input is on is equal to or greater value is smaller than turned on and when the current value is 7 the current value is set to the than the ON threshold the OFF threshold the output is turned off initial value the output is turned on the output is turned off 9 4 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE d 9 THE COUNTER FB e When ON threshold lt OFF threshold The output turns on when the current value is equal to or greater than the ON threshold and is smaller than the OFF threshold The output turns off when the current value is smaller than the ON threshold or is equal to or greater than the OFF threshold Preset input PRST Clock input CLK Up down selection oN input U D OFF ON Output OUT F OFF threshold CP3 ON threshold _____ CP2 Current value 7 When the preset input is on the current value is set to the initial value When the up down selection input is When the up down selection input is When the preset input is off and the clock input is turned on on and the clock input is turned on on and the clock input turns on the current value is incremented by 1 the current value is decremented by 1 the counter does not count 4 When the current value is equal to or When the current value is smaller than greater
286. reset value is stored FB TIMD 1 sec TIMD 100 ms TIMD 10 ms TIMD 1ms The range of Preset 0 to 65535 seconds 0 to 6553 5 seconds 0 to 655 35 seconds 0 to 65 535 seconds 8 6 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 value e The time numbers T already used in any other timer FBs cannot be used e Even if the preset value for the on delay count down timer is changed during counting the timer continues to operate with the original preset value until the execution input turns off When the execution input turns off the new preset value is reflected in the current value However if the preset value is changed to 0 the counting stops and the timer output is turned on immediately The preset values can be changed by external devices such as operator interfaces WindLDR and LCD and buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro Touch The changed preset values are stored in the RAM and the changes are not reflected to the user program saved in the ROM When the SmartAXIS is turned off the changed preset values are reset to the original values stored in the ROM e For details on how to store the changed preset value to the user program in the ROM see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer on page 8 1 Since the timer has advance error or behind error that error may cause a problem depending on the system For details see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer Timer Accu
287. ress of the data registers to read For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual D8185 Data Register ROM Backup Number of Registers to Read This special data register is used for the data register ROM backup and stores the number of data registers to read For details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 3 13 3 DEVICE ADDRESSES 3 14 PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DEC 4 FB REFERENCE This chapter describes the SmartAXIS series FB function Note The programming and operations on the SmartAXIS FBD program require specialist knowledge To make effective use of the SmartAXIS take the time to develop a thorough understanding of the contents in this manual and the programming FB List Input FB Symbol Name and Diagram Function Refer to Digital Input I our Inputs ON OFF information from an external to the SmartAXIS 5 1 Special Internal Relay Special internal relays can be used as bit inputs for FBs in the SM SM SmartAXIS Special function is allocated to each special internal relay _ 52 Es OUT For details on the individual special internal relays see Device Addresses Special Internal Relay Device Addresses on page 3 2 Shift Register R Um Outputs ON OFF state of a shift regi
288. rnal relay MO is connected to INI D100 is specified to 51 the internal relay M200 is specified to D1 1000 PULS2 0000 M0000 PULS2 FB execution input 1000 Output pulse frequency D0100 fl x f2 x f3 f f2 Pulse output ON M0200 Pulse output complete M0201 f1 f2 f3 2 frequency Output pulse Q15 e When the PULS2 FB execution input 10 turns from off to on M200 turns and pulses are output with the frequency configured by D100 e If the value of D100 is changed during pulse output pulses are output with the frequency based on that value The interval period for changing the pulse frequency has to be sufficiently long as compared to the output pulse frequency e When the PULS2 FB execution input turns from on to off M200 turns off and M201 turns on e The state of the initialization input MO are not reflected while the PULS2 FB execution input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the execution input Fi DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 5 a 15 THE PULSE PWM Pulse Width Modulation The PWM FB outputs pulses at the specified frequency and duty cycle from the output port Symbol EN PWM1 OUT EN PWM2 OUT INI INI EN PWM3 OUT EN PWM4 OUT INI INI Operation When the execution input EN is on pulses are output from the pulse output port n according
289. rns on The output keeps on until the execution input turns off Notes TO to T199 be used for the timer number However for 12 1 type TO to T99 can be used e The preset value be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored FB TIMU TIMU TIMU TIMU 1 sec 100 ms 10 ms 1ms The range of Preset valie 0 to 65535 seconds 0 to 6553 5 seconds 0 to 655 35 seconds 0 to 65 535 seconds e The time numbers T already used any other timer FBs cannot be used e If the preset value for the on delay count up timer is changed during counting the timer operates as follows 1 If the changed preset value is larger than the current value counting continues until the current value reaches the changed preset value 2 If the changed preset value is less than or equal to the current value the counting stops and the output turns on immediately e The preset values can be changed by external devices such as operator interfaces WindLDR and LCD and buttons on the SmartAXIS Pro Touch The changed preset values are stored in the RAM and the changes are not reflected to the user program saved in the ROM When the SmartAXIS is turned off the changed preset values are reset to the original values stored in the ROM e To store the changed preset values to the user pro
290. roles 10 17 ee i un Input 1 10 17 8 16 110 117 24 30 10 17 8 10 117 inii 120 127 130 135 NEIN 140 175 140 175 140 175 140 175 qu S Anpu 180 1115 90 180 15 90 180 115 90 180 1115 90 1120 1155 1120 1155 1120 1155 1120 1155 QO Q7 t 00 07 Output 9 00 03 4 Q0 Q7 8 16 010 017 18 00 03 4 020 021 Q40 061 Q40 Q61 Q40 Q61 Q40 Q61 Remote Output 9 1980 0101 54 080 0101 54 1080 0101 54 1080 0101 54 0120 0141 0120 0141 Q120 0141 Q120 0141 Relay 256 0 127 1024 0 1277 1024 0 1277 1024 0 1277 1024 Ra T M8000 M8177 144 M8000 M8177 144 M8000 M8177 144 8000 M8177 144 8000 M8177 144 Shift Register R RO R127 128 RO R127 128 RO Ri27 128 RO RI27 128 RO RI27 128 Timer TO T99 100 TO T199 200 70 199 200 199 200 1199 200 Counter 0 99 100 0 199 200 0 199 200 0 199 200 0 199 200 oy Register D0 p399 400 00 19992 2000 Do 19992 2000 D0 D1999 2000 00 01999 2000 Special Data D8000 08199 200 D8000 D8199 200 D8000 D8199 200 D8000 D8199 200 D8000 D8199 200 Register D Notes 1 are decimal numbers 2 when the power is turned on 3 details see Chapter 5 Special Functions Data Register ROM Backup in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual ZIDEC SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL
291. rs fails 8 Folder creation error Creating the folder fails 9 CSV file open error Opening the CSV file fails 32 Executing DLOG FB Writing log data to SD memory card is in progress 3 Settings The list of log data to be output to the CSV files Display type I Q M R T TC TP cc cP D AI DEC W X X X X X DEC I X DEC D X X X DEC L X DEC F X HEX W X X X X X HEX D X X X BIN B X X X X X X DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 16 3 16 THE DATA LOGGING 4 5 6 7 8 9 16 4 Tag Name Enter tag names or device addresses to specify the devices whose values are output to the CSV files Device Address When the devices are specified as tag names the corresponding device addresses are shown Display Type Select the display type from the following table for each device for when the device values are output to the CSV file Display type Range Maximum characters DEC W 0 to 65 535 5 DEC I 32 768 to 32 767 6 DEC D 0 to 4 294 967 295 10 DEC L 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 11 DEC F 3 402823 38 to 3 402823 38 13 HEX W 0000 to FFFF 4 HEX D 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 8 BIN B 1 1 Repeat The data in as many consecutive devices as the specified repeat starting from the specified device addre
292. rs that an output connector can be connected to TIMU oR e The output connector for bit output on off cannot be connected to an analog input connector There is no limit to the number of FBs that a single output connector can be connected to Note e FB input connectors cannot be connected each other and FB output connectors also can not be connected each other To incorporate the output results of a FB as looped back input an output FB digital output internal relay must be inserted in between the output connector and the input connector of the FB uj 4 14 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 4 FB REFERENCE FBD programs FBD program A group of FBs connected to an output FB is called a circuit block The minimum configuration of a circuit block is composed of an input FB and an output FB The FB operation results are passed to FBs connected by the connection line The group of all circuit blocks created in the program is called the FBD program Example of a minimum configuration of a circuit block Connection line Input FB i Output FB Scan time In the FBD program the processing to execute all of the programmed FBs is called one scan and the time required to execute the program for one scan is called the scan time FBD program execution For FBD programs all of the FBs composing circuit blocks and connected to an output FB digital output internal relay are executed se
293. rtAXIS when you click OK Notes The created program is downloaded to the SmartAXIS along with the function area settings For the function area settings see Chapter 5 Special Functions in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 1 12 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 OPERATION BASICS 4 When the following message is displayed the user program download is successful Program Download 9 intemal 1 Program Download Succeeded n DE SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 1 13 1 OPERATION BASICS Monitor Operation You can monitor the operations of the downloaded user program using the monitor function of WindLDR 1 After the user program is successfully downloaded from the WindLDR menu bar select Online gt Monitor gt Monitor The SmartAXIS state is displayed on the WindLDR screen 10000 1 sec Clock M8121 2 Monitor the following operations e When you turn on both input 10 and input I1 output 00 is turned on When you turn on either input I1 or input i2 output Q1 is repeatedly turned on and off in one second cycle The monitor operation is complete Notes e You can monitor the state of the input connectors and output connectors of each FB When input connectors output connectors and connection lines are red they are on Blue indicates off e For details on the state of unconnected input connectors of each FB see the chapters for th
294. s see User Program Execution Error in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 13 12 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 m DEC Applicable SmartAXIS 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Block number of the function block The block number is tomaticall igned in order from 0 but it can also be Number B Block number BO to B999 1 pP ri Laon NM changed to the desired number However overlapping block numbers used in any other function blocks cannot be used When the execution input turns on the YEAR FB operates EN Execution input On off When the execution input is off the YEAR FB does not operate and the output is off When configuring the date by specifying data registers the Input values configured in the WindLDR edit dialog box on the P ter t e stored in the dat iste hen the INI Initialization input On off Parameter tab are stored in the data registers w initialization input turns on The initialization input is only used for indirect designation of the YEAR FB settings with data registers Output OUT Output 2 Compares the specified date with the current date and outputs the result Select constant settings or indirect designation with data s registers for YEAR FB dates configuration Data regist ettin Enabled Disabled desc E If the data registers
295. scroll the text is displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD as follows Text IDEC Corporation 1234567812345678123456781234567812345678123456781234567812 E IDEC CoFporation NI OVI S OO OU I GO N2 E 39 62 5 msec 1 character 8 dots is scrolled 500 ms W 62 5 msec n DE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 19 14 THE INTERFACE FB 14 20 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 15 THE PULSE The pulse output FB outputs pulses at the specified frequency from the pulse output ports PULS Pulse Output The PULS FB outputs pulses at the specified frequency from the specified pulse output ports Symbol EN PULS1 INI EN PULS3 INI Operat
296. sday and Saturday ON settings OFF settings bit bit bit bit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Pee Ps fo fo Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Reserved Saturday Friday Thursday Wednesday Tuesday Monday Sunday Day of the week setting ON 0010010 Day of the week setting OFF 1000100 The value of the data register is 1001001000100 binary 4676 decimal The ON time and the OFF time are stored in each data register as follows 12 34 23 45 1 ri Example For 12 34 1234 Dec Example For 23 45 2345 Dec 4 Data register one word Data register one word 13 8 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DEC Operation Example To turn on output QO Monday to Friday each week from 8 30 to 17 15 Parameter tab WEEK Weekly Timer Devices 1 ON settings Day of the week 7 Sunday 7 Monday 7 Tuesday ON time hh mm s B OFF settings Day of the week sunday V Monday V Tuesday OFF time hh mm Aes Preview Week Day ON 2 Wednesday B Wednesday Thursday V Friday 9 Thursday Friday Saturday 7 Saturday Sunday Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Configure the tabs as shown above and connect the WEEK FB output to 0000 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB
297. settings for the YEAR FB with data registers the settings are allocated to the data registers are follows Storage Data size R read W destination word write Settings Start address 0 1 R W Year ON settings Start address 1 1 R W Month Day or Day of the week Start address 2 1 R W P 1 tab Year OFF settings Month Day or Day of the week number of Start address 3 1 R W days when Specify ON duration is selected Start address 4 1 R W ON settings Start address 5 1 R W Month Day or Day of the week Start address 6 1 R W P 2 tab Year OFF settings Month Day or Day of the week number of Start address 7 1 R W art address days when Specify ON duration is selected Start address 76 1 R W Year ON settings Start address 77 1 R W Month Day or Day of the week Start address 78 1 R W P 20 tab Year OFF settings Month D Day of th k f Start address4 79 1 R W g onth Day or Day of the week number o days when ON interval specified Note R W is the abbreviation for read write When R W it can be read and written When R it can only be read When W it can only be written Month Day or Day of the week data allocation in a data register The Month Day or Day of the week are allocated as bits in 1 data register as follows Month Day Data register one word Reserved Month setting Reserved Day setting
298. ss are output to the SD memory card For example when the display type of D10 is DEC W and the repeat is set to 5 the data is output to SD memory card as follows Time D0010 D0011 D0012 D0013 D0014 2011 09 07 15 40 00 12345 1 5 12 111 2011 09 07 15 41 00 1212 3 7 35 222 2011 09 07 15 42 00 345 4 99 79 333 Logging data size Header lt Log data 1 lt Log data 2 lt Log data 3 The amount of memory that the DLOG FB uses for the current log settings is shown The amount of memory used increases when a device to log the data is added You can register up to a maximum of 64 devices the total amount of memory must be less than or equal to 1 024 bytes One byte of memory area is required for each character Remaining size The amount of free memory the difference between the logging data size and 1 024 bytes is shown SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 ZIDEC 16 THE DATA LOGGING CSV File Output Format and File Format Configuration The CSV file output format is as follows You can change the separating character for each data and the decimal symbol for floating point numbers that are output to the CSV files on the Function Area Settings dialog box Output format Time D0010 D0020 D0030 D0050 D0060 2011 09 07 15 40 00 12345 1 5 12 111 2011 09 07 15 41 00 1212 3 7 35 222 2011 09 07 15 42 00 345 4 99 79 333 When the DLOG FB is executed and the CSV fi
299. ster device 5 3 Analog Input The analog input values 0 to 10V DC for the analog input terminals are converted to digital values 0 to 1 000 and output With the analog AI AI 5 4 AOUT input linear conversion function the analog input value be linearly conversion within a range of 32 768 to 32 767 Output FB Symbol Name and Diagram Function Sud Refer to Digital Output Q Outputs ON OFF information from the SmartAXIS to an external _ 6 1 IN lt gt OUT device Internal Relay M A bit unit FB used internally by the SmartAXIS 6 2 IDEC OUT SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 4 1 4 Logical Operation FB Output Symbol Name and Diagram Function Refer to Inversion Logical AND AND Ni amp OUT Implements logical AND for a maximum of four input signals ON 74 e m OFF and outputs the result N4 Negative Logical AND NAND amp p OUT Implements negative logical AND for a maximum of four input 7 72 i m signals ON OFF and outputs the result Logical OR OR N 21 Implements logical OR for a maximum of four input signals ON 7 3 m m OFF and outputs the result N4 Negative Logical OR NOR 21 Implements negative logical OR for a maximum of four input signals uH 74 ON OFF and outputs the result Exclusive
300. t on off can be connected to the Input IN Input On off function block having digital output on off input Output OUT Output Outputs the on off state of the input IN at the previous scan Parameters 1 to M317 for the 12 I O type 6 2 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 IDE 7 THE LOGICAL OPERATION The logical operation function blocks perform logical operations on the input signals and output the result AND Logical AND Calculates the logical AND on the input signals and outputs the result Symbol IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 Operation OUT The AND FB calculates the logical AND on a maximum of four input signals ON OFF and outputs the result Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Numbe B Block num BO to B999 1 M ele number The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used any other FBs cannot be used IN1 On off IN On off Any function block having digital output on off be connected to each Input input Unconnected inputs are handled as ON However all inputs cannot be IN3 On off unconnected IN4 On off Output OUT Output Outputs the result of logical AND on IN1 t
301. t as shown in above output format example When the date changes and the TRACE FB is executed a new CSV file is created with a new file name File format configuration procedure 1 From the WindLDR menu bar select Configuration Cartridges 2 Under Data Log and Trace CSV File Format configure the separating character and the decimal symbol The separating characters and the decimal symbols that are contained in the CSV file vary by country and region You can select the symbols to use from the following 1 Separating character comma or semicolon 2 Decimal symbol period or comma 3 Click the OK button to close the dialog box Function Area Settings L9 5 Configure the cartridges Memory Backup Input Configuration Memory Cartridge Communication Ports iz Enable Memory Cartridge Download festa Data Log and Trace CSV File Format Device Settings Separating Character Comma 1 Program Protection Decimal Symbol Period J 2 Self Diagnostic Calendar amp Clock Network Settings Connection Settings Default Cancel 16 12 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DEC 16 THE DATA LOGGING Examples TRACE FB When M0000 is turned on the accumulated data of 00000 through D0005 data type W word and D0010 data type F floating point are saved as decimal values in a CSV file in the RESULT folde
302. tag name Used data registers Shows the range of data registers used to store the settings This item changes when the device address or the number of parameter tabs changes Comment Shows the comment for the device address This item can be edited For allocating the data register area see Data Register Allocation on page 13 19 3 INI Initialization Input Specify the device to initialize the dates stored in the data register area that starts from S1 source 1 The values configured on the parameter tabs are stored in the data registers when the initialization input is turned on This setting is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the YEAR FB with data registers 4 S2 The number of parameter tabs Specify the number of parameter tabs This setting is shared in common with Configuring the dates as constant setting on page 13 14 See 4 S2 The number of parameter tabs on page 13 14 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 13 17 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB 5 Pulse Output Select the operation of the YEAR FB output OUT This setting is applied to all parameter tabs This setting is shared in common with Configuring the dates as constant setting on page 13 14 See 5 Pulse Output on page 13 15 6 Data Register Allocation Click this button to display the Data Register Allocation dialog box As shown below a table of the data registers and their corresponding YEAR FB
303. tarts the pulse output stops and Preset value is changed ton2 value reaches the preset value n2 PWM1 FB execution input 1000 IP d Pulse width ratio D0201 x EE Preset value D0202 D0203 ni x n2 xX n3 i ni i i n2 i wii w2 Output pulse 014 Pulse output M0050 Pulse output complete M0051 1 w2 w3 pulse width ratio n1 n2 n3 output pulse count e When the PWM1 FB execution input 10 turns from off to on M50 turns on and pulses are output with the width ratio configured by D201 e When the number of pulses configured by D202 and D203 are output pulse output stops e If the value of D201 is changed during pulse output pulses are output with the width ratio based on the changed value The interval period for changing the width ratio has to be sufficiently long as compared to the output pulse frequency e When the PWM1 FB execution input changes from on to off M50 turns off and M051 turns on at the same time as that e The state of the initialization input MO are not reflected while the PWM1 FB execution input is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the execution input Fi DE SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 9 15 THE PULSE PWM 2 pulse counting disabled timing chart For PWM2 FB the external input 10 is connected to EN the internal relay 0 is c
304. ter on the special data list window popped up when Special Data is pressed Size of the area used on the LCD screen varies based on the selected special data Display Occupied Area Special data Lines x Display type Display example January 1 2012 13 30 columns Current date YYYY MM DD 2012 01 01 1x10 Current time HH MM 13 30 1x5 Date the input to the MSG FB is turned on YYYY MM DD 2012 01 01 1x10 Time the input to the MSG FB is turned on HH MM 13 30 1x5 8 Special Character A special character can be entered at the cursor position Select the character to enter on the special characters list window popped up when Special Character is pressed The special characters that can be used are as follows Special characters list v A lt gt 9 Insert Overwrite Selects insert or overwrite as the character input mode Click this button to switch the input mode 10 Priority The priority of the MSG FB can be configured between 0 to 49 0 is the highest priority and 49 is the lowest priority The same priority cannot be set for multiple MSG FBs e When inputs to two or more MSG FBs turns on the message of the MSG FB with the highest priority is displayed out of all the MSG FBs with inputs that are on e When the MSG FB input with the highest priority changes from on to off the message for the MSG FB with the next highest priority is displayed the priority is checked when the input chan
305. ters with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the execution input SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 m DEC 15 THE PULSE Sample program To perform a zero return operation with deceleration signal 13 initial pulse frequency 3 kHz and creep pulse frequency 800 Hz 10001 When SmartAXIS changes from STOP to RUN the initialize input M8120 turns on Initialize Pulse e When the ZRN1 FB execution input turns on pulse output M8120 90000 starts ZRN Zero Return E37 Devices Settings ZRN 1 Q0014 51 Register INI InitializationInput DE Deceleration Input D1 OperationStatus Tag Name D0000 M8120 3 Device Address D0000 M8120 10003 0100 Comment Initialize Pulse ZRN Zero Return EN o Devices Settings Function DR Setting Description Initial operation mode Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Initial pulse frequency D0000 3000 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1Hz Creep operation mode Mode 0 1Hz to 10 kHz Creep pulse frequency 00001 800 1 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Error status D0002 Function Device address Setting value Details Initial operation mode Mode 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz Initial pulse frequency D0000 3000 3 kHz Creep operation mode Mode 0 1 Hz to 10 kHz Creep pulse frequency D0001 800 800 Hz
306. th Configuring the day of the week and the time as constant settings on page 13 3 See 4 S2 The number of parameter tabs on page 13 3 13 6 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 ZIDEC 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB 5 Pulse Output Select the operation for the WEEK FB output OUT This setting is applied to all parameter tabs This setting is shared in common with Configuring the day of the week and the time as constant settings on page 13 3 See 5 Pulse Output on page 13 4 6 Data Register Allocation Click this button to display the Data Register Allocation dialog box As shown below a table of the data registers and their corresponding WEEK FB settings is displayed in the dialog box 7 Click Allocate Comments 8 and you can set each name of the settings each contents to the comments for the corresponding data registers This button is only used when indirectly specifying the settings for the WEEK FB with data registers Data Register Allocation dialog box Data Register Allocation 1 Description P1 Day of the week ON and OFF 00001 P1 0N Time D0002 P1 OFF Time D0003 P2 Day of the week ON and OFF D0004 P2 ON Time 7 00005 P2 OFF Time D0006 P3 Day of the week ON and OFF 00007 P3 ON Time 00008 P3 OFF Time D0009 P4 Day of the week ON and OFF 00010 4 Time 00011 P4 OFF Time D0012 P5 Day of the week ON and OFF nona P5 ON Time Allocate Comments 8 Close
307. that uses floating point a user program execution error occurs and special internal relay M8004 user program execution error turns on Value Exponent e Significand f Representation in WindLDR 0 e 0 f 0 0 0 Denormal numbers e 0 f gt 0 1 175495 38 to 1 175495E 38 3 402823E 38 to 1 175495 38 Normal numbers 0 lt e lt 255 Arbitrary 1 175495E 38 to 3 402823 38 infinity f 0 INF e 255 Not a Number f gt 0 NAN TIDEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 4 11 4 Inverting FB input output The state of the FB output connector connected to an input connector can be inverted and incorporated The inverted input value to the FB is the same as when the NOT FB negation FB is connected immediately before the input connector The result of the FB operation can also be inverted and output At that time the output value from the FB is the same as when the NOT FB negation FB is connected immediately after the output connector inversion Output of FB connected to IN1 State of IN1 incorporated in FB ON OFF OFF ON mOutput inversion FB FB operation result FB output ON OFF OFF ON FB analog input The SmartAXIS is equipped with analog input ports Analog values input to the analog input ports be processed in FBD programs FBs that can handle analog values as input are the CMP Data Comparison STTG Schmitt Trigger and RCMP Ran
308. the programming language you are able to create a FBD program with a maximum size of 38 000 bytes For the 12 I O type the FBD program can be created with a maximum size of 10 000 bytes There are also limitations on the number of FBs that can be used in a single FBD program Even if the size of the FBD program is less than the maximum size FBs cannot be added to the program when the maximum number of FBs are already used in the program The maximum size of FBD program and the maximum number of FBs are as follows 12 I O Type 24 I O 40 48 Types Maximum size of FBD program 10 000 bytes 38 000 bytes Block B 200 1 000 Maximum number of blocks timers and counters that can be used in the FBD program Timer T 190 zm Counter C 100 200 1 Some FBs use more than one device For details about each FB see the description from Chapter 5 special FB The size of the FBD program is the total of the size of all FBs used in the FBD program The input FB through Chapter 18 The The number of Block B is the total number of FBs that use blocks B in the program The number of Timer T and Counter C is the total number of devices used by the timer and counter FBs in the program The number of Timer T and Counter C does not match the number of timer and counter FBs in the program The size quantities of bytes and the number of used devices of FBs are listed below
309. tion Adding Counter CNT When the clock input is turned on the current value is CNT UP incremented by one The output turns on when the current value 9 1 reaches the preset value Up Down Selection Reversible Counter When the clock input is turned on the current value is incremented id PRT CUD or decremented by one according to the up down selection input 53 mA The current value is compared with ON OFF thresholds The output turns on or off according to the comparison result Hour Meter Accumulates the ON duration of the execution input in hours EN HOUR minutes and seconds HOUR RST 2 2 9 7 The output turns on when the accumulated time reaches the configured time IDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 4 3 4 Shift Register FB Symbol Name and Diagram Function Feind Refer to Shift Register TRG SFR OUT When the execution input turns on the shift registers are shifted SFR RST n X 10 1 DI to the specified shift direction DIR Data Comparison FB Symbol Name and Diagram Function Mia Refer to Data Comparison EN CMP OUT Two inputs values are compared and the output turns on or off CMP DAT1 X 11 1 DAT2 according to the comparison result Schmitt Trigger STIG m The comparison input value and the ON OFF thresnoids are STTG DATA
310. tion Errors in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual 11 6 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 12 THE DATA CONVERSION The data conversion FB converts the data stored in devices ALT Alternate Output Sets resets the output Symbol TRG ALT SET RST OUT Operation While the set input SET and the reset input RST are off the on off state of the output is inverted at every rising edge in the execution input TRG When the set input is on the output is set When the reset input is on the output is reset When the set input and the reset input are both on the output is set reset according to the operation mode Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned ascending order from zero The block number Number Biek number Boto B933 be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used TRG Execution On off At a rising edge in the execution input the on off state of the output is input inverted input SET Set input On off When the set input is on the output is set RST Reset input On off When the reset input is on the output is reset When the set input the reset input and the output are off the output is set at a rising edg
311. tion block programming available devices and function block lists and details of each function block SmartAXIS Touch Describes product specifications installation and wiring instructions instructions for FT9Y B1390 setting basic programming actions and special functions device and instruction lists User s Manual communication functions and troubleshooting procedures for the Touch series Describes usage instructions for WindLDR programming software for the SmartAXIS Pro Lite series Describes programming for the SmartAXIS Touch series and usage instructions for the WindO I NV3 configuration software WindLDR Help WindO I NV3 Help DEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 Preface 3 NAMES AND ABBREVIATIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL Model Names Name Used in this Manual Description Detailed Type No SmartAXIS FT1A programmable logic controllers Modules without LCD SmartAXIS Lite FT1A B12RA FT1A B12RC FT1A B24RA FT1A B24RC FT1A B40RKA FT1A B40RSA FT1A B40RC FT1A B48KA FT1A B48SA FT1A B48KC FT1A B48SC Modules with LCD SmartAXIS Pro FT1A H12RA FT1A H12RC FT1A H24RA FT1A H24RC FT1A H40RKA FT1A H40RSA FT1A H40RC FT1A H48KA FT1A H48SA FT1A H48KC FT1A H48SC Modules that extend the functionality of display FT1A M12RA W FT1A M12RA B FT1A M12RA S FT1A C12RA W FT1A C12RA B FT1A C12RA S See Touch FT1A M14KA W FT1A M14KA B FT1A M14KA S F
312. to the control register S1 settings When pulse output completes the output OUT turns on The pulse control information output on output complete error is stored in the specified internal relays as the operation status When the initialization input INI is on the initial values configured in the Settings tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers Note The same pulse output port cannot be shared with more than one PWM FB However the ZRN Zero Return FB can be configured with the same pulse output port as the PULS Pulse Output PWM Pulse Width Modulation RAMP Ramp Pulse Output and ARAMP Advanced Ramp FBs Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X Note These instructions cannot be used with FT1A HAORC and FT1A B40RC Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify each function block The block number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Numbe B Block numbe BO to B999 s emer The block number can be changed to a desired number However the block numbers already used in any other FBs cannot be used When the execution input is on pulses are output from the pulse output EN Execution input On off port according to the control register S1 settings Input When the execution input turns off the pulse output stops INI Initialization On off When the initialization input is on the initial
313. tputs the input state on off to the specified internal relay Symbol IN OUT Operation The internal relay FB outputs the on off state of the input IN at the previous scan from the output OUT Specify an internal relay number Notes The output state of internal relay FB can be maintained when the SmartAXIS starts the operation using the keep designation For details on the keep designation see the following chapter e Chapter 5 Special Functions Keep and clear devices in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual e Chapter 3 Projects 4 Special Functions Keep and Clear Control Devices in the SmartAXIS Touch User s Manual e When a FB is connected to the input connector of the internal relay FB and the on off state of the internal relay is changed with the button operations on the SmartAXIS or WindLDR monitor dialog box the changed state is immediately overwritten with the output state of the connected FB Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify the internal relay FB Internal rela The internal relay number is automatically assigned in ascending order from Number M y to 1277 zero The internal relay number can be changed to a desired number However the internal relay numbers already used in any other internal relay FBs cannot be used Any function block having digital outpu
314. ttings and OFF settings D0001 1 tab ON time 830 0002 OFF time 1715 FBD program 4 In operation Output M8125 B6000 Initialize Pulse M8120 B0003 B0001 B0004 0001 The initialization input 0000 turns on with the first scan the initial settings configured the 1 tab stored 00000 to 0002 The WEEK FB starts operating according to the values of data registers 00000 to 00002 e When M0010 turns on the ON time 00001 changes to 9 00 and the OFF time 00002 changes to 17 00 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 When M0001 turns on all of the WEEK FB settings 00000 to 00002 return to the initial settings 13 11 13 THE WEEK PROGRAMMER FB YEAR Yearly Timer Compares the specified date with the current date and outputs that result The dates can be specified in a full year Symbol EN YEAR OUT INI Operation description While the execution input EN is on the output OUT is turned on when the current date reaches the current date reaches the date specified by the ON settings The output OUT is turned off when the current date reaches the date specified by the OFF settings For example when the ON settings are December 15 2012 and the OFF settings are January 20 2013 the output OUT turns on and off as follows Year 2012 2013 Month 11 12 1 2 15th i l ON 1 1
315. ulse output the change is not reflected in pulse output operation The changed content is reflected the next time the RAMP1 FB execution input turns from off to on The state of the initialization input MO are not reflected while the RAMP1 FB execution input 10 is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the execution input SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 THE PULSE RAMP1 FB reversible control enabled dual pulse output mode timing chart For RAMP1 FB the external input IO is connected to EN the internal relay MO is connected to INI the internal relay M10 is connected to DIR D200 is specified to S1 the internal relay M50 is specified to D1 I000 RAMP1 Q000 M0000 M0010 RAMP FB execution input I000 Control direction input M0010 Forward CW output pulse 014 Reverse CCW output pulse 015 Control direction 0 Forward 1 Reverse Pulse output ON Pulse output complete Pulse output state e When the RAMP1 FB execution input 10 is on pulses are output from 014 or 015 according to the settings configured by the data registers e When pulse output starts M50 turns on M52 is on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing e The pulses frequency increases according to the frequency change time every 10 ms until it reaches the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency
316. umber are used The preset value Hours Minutes and Seconds are stored in those counters in order To indirectly specify the preset value with data registers specify the start data register of the data registers where the values are stored The preset value uses three consecutive data registers and Hours Minutes and Seconds are stored in those data registers in order The range of start data register is DO to D997 and D1000 to 01997 However the range is DO to D397 for the 12 1 type The Hours can be configured in the range of 0 to 65535 and the Minutes and Seconds can be configured in the range of 0 to 59 ZIDEC Keep output clear output SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 One of the following two operations can be specified for when the accumulated time exceeds the preset value the output is on and the execution input is turned off 1 Keep When the execution input is turned off the output state is maintained The output is maintained until the reset input is turned on 2 Clear When the execution input is turned off the output is turned off The default is 1 9 7 9 THE COUNTER FB Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X RST Reset input X X X X X X Preset value X Timing Chart e When the selected operation mode is Clear Output When the execution input is turned When the ex
317. unt Up Timer on page 8 1 Since the timer has advance error or behind error that error may cause a problem depending on the system For details see The timer FB TIMU On delay Count Up Timer Timer Accuracy on page 8 3 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 THE TIMER RPULS Random Pulse Output The output is on for the length of random time within the configured range of time Symbol EN RPULS OUT EN RPULS OUT 100 ms 100 ms EN RPULS OUT EN RPULS OUT 10 ms 1 ms Operation When the execution input EN turns on the output OUT turns on for a random time within the range between the ON time maximum 1 and ON time minimum 2 Then the output turns off for the remaining time of the specified cycle TP3 When the execution input is off the output is off Applicable SmartAXIS FT1A 12 FT1A 24 FT1A 40 FT1A 48 FT1A Touch X X X X X Parameters Parameter Function Range Description Unique number to identify the Timer function block The timer number is automatically assigned in ascending order from zero Number T Timer number to T197 The timer number can be changed to a desired number However the timer numbers already used in any other Timer FBs cannot be used When the execution input turns on the ON time is randomly determined in the following range and counting starts Input EN Execution On off The range of ON time ON time minimum lt ON time lt ON time maxi
318. unter CNT X X X X X X X X X Counter Up Down Selection Reversible CUD X X X X X X X X X Counter Hour Meter HOUR X X X X X X X X X Shift Register Shift Register SFR X X X X X X X X X Data Data Comparison CMP X X X X X X X X X Comparison Schmitt Trigger STTG X X X X X X X X X Range Comparison RCMP X X X X X X X X X 11 Alternate Output ALT x x x X x x xX X X Week Weekly Timer WEEK X X X X X X X X X Programmer Yearly Timer YEAR X X X X X X X X X X Interface Message MSG md 1 1 1 is 1 mul 1 1 E 1 1 Pulse Output PULS 2 X X Pulse Width Modulation PWM ice 2 X X Pulse X X X Ramp Pulse Output RAMP Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Zero Return ZRN X X X X X X Advanced Ramp ARMP Note 3 Note 3 Note 3 Data Logging Data Log DLOG X X X X X X X X Script Script SCRPT X X X X X X X X X High speed Counter HSC X X X X X Special RS Flip flop RSFF X X X X X X X X X Note 1 The MSG FB can be used only with SmartAXIS Pro Note 2 When using RAMP1 in single pulse output mode PULS3 and PWM3 cannot be used When using RAMP2 in single pulse output mode PULS4 and PWM4 cannot be used Note 3 When using RAMP1 or ARAMP1 in dual pulse output mode RAMP2 or ARAMP2 cannot be used IDEC SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 47 4 Applicable Data Types
319. until it reaches the preset value When the execution input is off the current value is 0 Output OUT Output B The output is on when the SERIE value is greater than or equal to the preset value The output is off in all other cases Specify the time interval on delay time from when the execution input turns TP Preset value 0 to 65 535 on to when the output turns on The preset value can be specified using a Parameters constant or a data register 2 TU Time unit 1 Specify the time unit for the timer 1 TO to T99 for the 12 I O type 2 preset value be 0 to 65 535 and specified using a constant or a data register To indirectly specify the preset value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T cc B D AI Constant TRG Execution input X X X X X X X Preset value X X IDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 1 8 THE TIMER Timing Chart Execution input ON TRG OFF J Output ON OUT OFF EMEN NET EN On delay time Change in current value i Preset value 0 When the execution input TRG is off the current value is 0 and the output OUT is off When the execution input turns on counting starts While the execution input is on the current value is incremented and when it reaches the preset value TP the counting stops and the output tu
320. urrent Data Read only Subnet mask of the SmartAXIS is stored to the special data registers as shown below Example Subnet mask aaa bbb ccc ddd D8088 aaa D8089 bbb D8090 ccc D8091 ddd D8092 D8095 Default Gateway Current Data Read only Default gateway of the SmartAXIS is stored to the special data registers as shown below Example Default gateway aaa bbb ccc ddd D8092 aaa D8093 bbb D8094 ccc D8095 ddd D8110 D8121 Connection 1 through 3 Connected IP Address The IP address of the remote host accessing the connection 1 through 3 is stored in special data registers Example Connection 1 Connected IP Address aaa bbb ccc ddd D8110 aaa D8111 bbb D8112 ccc D8113 ddd D8130 D8132 Connection Connected Port Number When connections are established with other network devices the port numbers of the connected network devices are stored in these special data registers D8130 Connection 1 Connected Port Number D8131 Connection 2 Connected Port Number D8132 Connection 3 Connected Port Number 3 12 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DEC 13 DEVICE ADDRESSES D8133 Data Register ROM Backup Execution Status This special data register is used for the data register ROM backup Stores the execution status for writing and reading 1 Processing 2 Normal termination 3 Cannot access ROM 4 Invalid values are stored in D8184 starting address to read and D8185 number of registers to read 5 Valid data could
321. ut Control Pulse output Control port direction port direction Disable Q14 A Q14 A ARAMP1 Single pulse output Q14 A 016 2 Q14 A Q12 C Dual pulse output Q14 A Q15 B 3 Q14 A 015 3 Disable Q15 B 015 ARAMP2 Single pulse output Q15 B Q17 C 2 Q15 B 013 Dual pulse mode cannot be used x B 1 When using single pulse output mode on the 40 type 016 017 is used as the control direction port Therefore PULS3 PWM3 or PULS4 PWM4 cannot be used 2 Outputs the on off state of the control direction input 3 When using ARAMP1 in dual pulse output mode RAMP2 or ARAMP2 cannot be used IDEC SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 31 15 THE PULSE 9 Number of step Specify the number of steps The maximum is 18 steps 10 Start step number When the input turns from off to on pulse output starts with the settings for the step configured as the start number 11 Interrupt step number When the interrupt input changes from off to on the pulse output process for the running step is aborted and pulse output restarts with the settings for the step configured by the interrupt number RAMP table frequency table tab ARAMP Ramp Pulse Output with Table E37 Devi Settings Ramp Table Function DR Setting Description teady pulse frequency 1 3 100 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz Frequency change time 100 10 to 10 0
322. ut Ethernet port M8120 Initialize Pulse When the CPU starts operation M8120 turns on for a period of one scan Ec 8120 L Start M8121 1 sec Clock While M8001 1 sec clock reset is off M8121 generates clock 20o mg SS pulses 1 sec increments with a duty ratio of 1 1 500 ms on and 500 ms off H4 1 sec M8122 100 ms Clock M8122 always generates clock pulses in 100 ms increments M whether M8001 is with duty ratio of 1 1 50 ms on M8122 50 ms off me 100 gt M8123 10 ms Clock M8123 always generates clock pulses in 10 ms increments dn Pus whether 8001 is on or off with a duty ratio of 1 1 5 ms on and 5 ms off M8123 F 10ms 4 M8124 Timer Counter Preset Value Changed When timer counter preset values are changed in the CPU module RAM M8124 turns on When a user program is downloaded to the CPU from WindLDR or when the changed timer counter preset value is cleared M8124 turns off When a timer or counter is designated as a destination of an advanced instruction the timer counter preset value is also changed M8125 In operation Output M8125 remains on while the CPU is running M8154 Write Data Register values to ROM This special internal relay is used for the data register ROM backup When M8154 is on at the end of scan the values of all data registers are written to ROM After writing values the execution status is stored
323. value is stored in 00002 IDEC room temp is Bar graph is used to Show the rise and fall in temperature visually Displays the current date Settings Configure the following items 1 Text with Effect 4 Special Character How d Bit Device zn N 1 1 5 Bar Graph 3 6 Special Data Setting items Setting details Device M0000 Display Option All disabled scroll blink invert 1 Bit Device ON Text IDEC room temp is OFF Text IDEC outdoor temp is Text Now 2 Text with Effect Display Option All disabled scroll blink invert Device D0002 3 Word Device Data Type I integer Conversion Type Decimal 4 Special Character C Device 0002 Data Type I integer Max 50 5 Bar Graph Min 20 Origin 0 Blinking Settings Disabled 6 Special Data Current date 14 10 SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 14 THE INTERFACE FB Operation Procedure 1 On WindLDR right click menu click Advanced gt Display gt MSG Message 2 The MSG Message dialog box opens Configuring the bit device 3 Select the area to insert the parameter and click Bit Device MSG Message eax Options Priority E Acknowledgment LCD Display Settings LCD Display SpecialData special Character Insert Work Area
324. value reaches the preset value n2 v i PULS1 FB execution input 1000 Output pulse frequency D0200 fi X f2 X MEL J ni n2 f2 fl output puse o Pulse output ON M0050 Si ek a i VEEE Pulse output complete 0051 f1 f2 frequency ni n2 n3 output pulse count e When the PULS1 FB execution input 10 turns from off to on M50 turns and pulses are output with the frequency configured by D200 When the number of pulses configured by D202 and D203 are output pulse output stops e Ifthe value of D200 is changed during pulse output pulses are output with the frequency based on the changed value The interval period for changing the pulse frequency has to be sufficiently long as compared to the output pulse frequency e When the PULS1 FB execution input 10 changes from on to off M50 turns off and M51 turns on e The state of the initialization input MO are not reflected while the PULS1 FB execution input 10 is on If you wish to initialize the data registers with the initialization input turn the initialization input on after turning off the execution input SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 THE PULSE PULS2 FB pulse counting disabled timing chart For PULS2 FB the external input I0 is connected to EN the inte
325. value with a data register specify the data register number where the preset value is stored 3 The cycle is only effective when continuance is selected as the operation mode The cycle setting is not necessary when single pulse is selected as the operation mode Valid Devices Parameter Descipion I Q R TC TP C CC CP B D Constant CEN Executioninput X X X X X X X 1 ON time maximum X X TP2 ON time minimum X X TP3 Cycle X X IDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 19 8 THE TIMER Timing Chart 1 When the operation mode is single pulse The output ON time is randomly determined at each execution within the range between ON time minimum and ON time maximum Execution input ON EN OFF 1 EN Output ON NE OUT OFF i3 ON time minimum ON time maximum When the execution input turns off the output turns off i Cycle If single pulse is selected as the operation mode the output OUT turns on for a random time within the range of time between ON time minimum and ON time maximum when the execution input EN turns on Then afterward the output turns off and remains off 2 When the operation mode is continuance The output ON time is randomly determined cyclically within the range between ON time minimum and ON time maximum 2 Execution input ON EN OFF Output ON j OUT
326. values are written to the data registers with each scan To initialize the values only one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU Shot up FB or the SOTD Shot down FB 2 When reversible control is disabled the control direction input is disabled SMARTAXIS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 11 15 THE PULSE Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T B D AI Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X X Initialization input X X X DIR Control direction input X X X X X X X 51 Control register x Di Operation status x 1 Special data registers cannot be used 2 Internal relays can be used However the first digit of the internal relay number must be set to 0 Special internal relays cannot be used Settings a Device tab RAMP Ramp Pulse Output Devices Settings 1 Q0014 gt 1 Tag Name 51 Control Register 2 8 Device Address Comment INI Initialization Input D1 OperationStatus 3 45 Cancel 1 RAMP FB selection Select the RAMP FB from RAMP1 or RAMP2 The reversible control mode that can be selected differs according to the RAMP FB For the combinations of RAMP FB pulse output port numbers and the reversible control mode see 9 Reversible control enable on page 15 14 2 S1 Control Reg
327. values configured in the Settings input tab of the editing dialog box in WindLDR are stored in the control registers Output OUT Output When the pulse output has completed the output turns and keeps Pulse output Specify the pulse output port number for the PWM FB The pulse output port PWM1 to PWM4 Port number i differs with PWM1 through PWM4 DO to D993 Specify the starting number of the data registers to use with the PWM FB Parameters Si Control register D1000 to D1993 Starting from the specified data register 7 consecutive data registers are used Specify the starting number of the internal relays to use with the PWM FB Di Operation status 0 to M1270 Starting from the specified internal relay 3 consecutive internal relays are used 1 The bit device such as an external input IO to 1155 or an internal relay MO to M1277 can be specified When the initialization input is on the initial values are written to the data registers with each scan To initialize the values only one time use the initialization input in combination with the SOTU Shot up FB or the SOTD Shot down FB 15 6 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE Valid Devices 15 THE PULSE FB Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP B D AI Constant EN Execution input X X X X X X Initialization input X X X 51 Control register x1 S2 Operat
328. versible control enabled single pulse output mode timing chart For RAMP1 FB the external input IO is connected to EN the internal relay MO is connected to INI the internal relay M10 is connected to DIR D200 is specified to S1 the internal relay M50 is specified to D1 15 16 1000 RAMP1 0000 0000 0010 RAMP FB execution input 1000 Control direction input M0010 Control direction D0203 0 Forward X 1 Reverse Output pulse Q14 Control direction output 615 ere oe Pulse output ON M0050 Pulse output complete M0051 Pulse output state M0052 When the RAMP FB execution input 10 is on pulses are output according the settings configured by the control registers The control direction is output to 016 or 012 according to the on off state of the control direction input M10 When pulse output starts M50 turns on M52 is on while the pulse frequency is increasing or decreasing The pulses frequency increases according to the frequency change time every 10 ms until it reaches the steady pulse frequency from the initial pulse frequency When the configured number of pulses are output the pulse output stops In this situation M50 turns off M51 turns on and QO turns on If the RAMP1 FB execution input 10 turns off during pulse output pulse output stops If the execution input turns on again the operation starts from the beginning Even if the contents of the data registers are changed during p
329. wing manner according to the selection in Function Area Settings under Device Settings For applicable devices and FBs see Chapter 5 Special Functions Storage Method of 32 bit Data in the SmartAXIS Pro Lite User s Manual Word device When From Upper Word is selected under Device Settings When D0000 is specified as the storage location the upper word is stored in D0000 and the lower word is stored in D0001 Double word data constant Upper word Lower word 1234567 8 00000 1234 Upper word Hexadecimal D0001 5 6 7 8 Lower word When From Lower Word is selected under Device Settings When D0000 is specified as the storage location the lower word is stored in D0000 and the upper word is stored in D0001 Double word data constant Upper word Lower word 12345678 D0000 5 6 7 8 Lower word Hexadecimal D0001 1 2 3 4 Upper word Bit device When 000 is specified as the storage location the lower word is stored the range R000 R015 and the upper word is stored in the range 16 1 Double word data constant Upper word Lower word R015 R000 12345678 R000 R015 5 6 7 8 Lower word Hexadecimal RO31 R016 x R016 R031 1 2 3 4 Upper word 4 10 SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 ZIDEC 4 FB REFERENCE Data Float Handling numeric values in floating point arithmetic operations With the SmartAXIS series F
330. with Table ex Devices Settings Ramp Table Step 1 Function DR Setting Description Step 2 Steady pulse frequency 00014 1 1 to 10 000 in increments of 1 Hz ae Frequency change time D0015 4000 10 to 10 000 in increments of 1 ms Preset value 00016 00017 4000 1to 100 000 000 Control direction D0018 Acceleration deceleration control D0018 Acceleration deceleration later Next step number 00019 0 0 to 3 step Function Device address Setting value Details Steady pulse frequency D0014 1 1 Hz Frequency change time D0015 4000 4 000 msec Preset value D0016 D0017 4000 Preset value 4 000 Control direction D0018 Acceleration deceleration control D0018 Acceleration deceleration later Acceleration deceleration later 2 Next step number D0019 2 0 output 15 38 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 15 THE PULSE This section describes example program that outputs pulses as shown below with the frequency change function single pulse output reversible control enabled using the following settings The pulses are output from 014 100 kHz Step 1 Step 2 Step 3 Step 4 Preset value 5 000 Preset value 5 000 1 2 pasata Frequency change time Frequency change time 3 000 msec 3 000 msec 200Hz 6 1 2 Frequency change time Frequency change time 3 000 msec 3 000 msec 1 2
331. xecution input hours minutes seconds is measured and accumulated The output OUT is turned on when the accumulated ON time is equal to or greater than the preset value configured in CP When the output is on and the execution input is turned off the output is kept on or turned off according to the operation mode specified by OP The accumulated ON time is retained even when the execution input is off When the reset input is on the accumulated ON time is reset to 0 hours 0 minutes 0 seconds and the output is turned off regardless of the on off state of the execution input 9 8 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 10 THE SHIFT REGISTER This chapter describes the shift register FB of the SmartAXIS series SFR Shift Register Shifts as many shift registers as the number of constituent bits starting from the specified shift register according to the direction input Symbol TRG SFR OUT RST DI DIR Operation When the reset input RST is off and the execution input TRG is turned on shift registers as many as the number of constituent bits starting with the specified shift register are shifted by 1 bit according to the on off state of the direction input DIR At the same time the on off state of the data input DI is stored in the LSB least significant bit or the MSB most significant bit e When the direction input is off the shift registers are shifted in ascending order RO gt R1
332. y 2305 September 1st D0002 Year 2013 OFF settings D3 Month Day 1573 June 25th FBD program In operation Output B0000 M8125 Initialize Pulse M8120 0003 B0004 The initial settings configured on the P 1 tab are stored in 00000 D0003 at the first scan e The YEAR FB starts operating according to the values of data registers 00000 to 00003 e When M0010 turns on the ON settings year changes to 2013 00000 and the OFF settings year changes to 2020 00002 e When 0001 turns on all of the YEAR FB settings D0000 to D0003 return to the initial settings 13 26 SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 DE 14 THE INTERFACE Introduction The interface FB displays the specified data on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD MSG Message The MSG FB displays data such as text and device values on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD EN MSG OUT Operation When the execution input EN is on a text message is displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD according to the content configured in the MSG FB dialog box and the output OUT turns on When the execution input is off the MSG FB does not operate and the output turns off The following types of data can be displayed on the SmartAXIS Pro LCD Device values can be displayed e Word device values can be displayed as numeric values according to the specified data type For details see Insert Word Device on page 14 5 e Word device values can be displayed as
333. y specify the preset value with a data register 1 which the preset value is stored and store a constant value the data register the range of o 1 1 Valid Devices Parameter Function I Q M R T TC TP B D AI Constant RST Reset input X X X X X X X UP Up clock input X X X X X X X CP Preset value X X IDE SMARTAXTS PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 9 1 9 THE COUNTER FB Timing Chart When the reset input is on The output is turned on when the current value is resetto0 the current value and the When the reset input is on and the output is turned off preset value are equal the up clock input has no effects on N Reset input RST OFF Up clock input UP OFF EE RN i Output OUT Preset value Current value 0 0 When the reset input is off the counter is in the countable state While the counter is in the countable state it increments the current value at every rising edge in the up clock input When the current value reaches the preset value the counting ends and the output is kept on until the reset input is turned on After the counting ends the current value does not change even when the up clock input is turned on When the reset input RST is on the current value is reset to 0 and the output OUT is turned off regardless of the on off state of the up clock input UP Relati
334. ynchronous 16 bit reference timers Therefore an error occurs depending on the status of the asynchronous 16 bit timer when the timer FB is executed TIMU 1 ms 1 ms timer TIMU 1 sec TIMU 100 ms TIMU 10 ms 1 sec timer 100 ms timer 10 ms timer Advance error 1000 ms 100 ms 10 ms 1ms Max Behind error One scan time One scan time One scan time One scan time a Timeout output error The output memory status is set to the actual output at the End processing So an error occurs depending on the timing when the timer FB is executed in the user program in case the timeout output turns on Error Definition Tte The time from the timer FB execution to the END processing Program END TIMU END processing Timeout output _ memory Actual output i 1 Tte i 4 One scan time Timeout output error is equal to the Tte behind error and can be between 0 and one scan time 0 Tte 1 scan time SMARTAXIS FBD PROGRAMMING MANUAL FT9Y B1386 8 3 TIDEC 8 THE TIMER list Timer input error Timer counting error Time up output error Overall error calculation formula Advance error 05 0 0 0 0 Tet Tie Behind error Tet Tie 0 0 Tte Advance error Advance error 0 Time unit 0 Time unit Tte Tet ax Behind error 1 s t Tet 1 s t 1 s t Tte 1 s t 2 s t Tte Tet 1 Advanc

"user manual"

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

&quot;user manual&quot;

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

"user manual"